xref: /vim-8.2.3635/src/misc1.c (revision 21cf823a)
1 /* vi:set ts=8 sts=4 sw=4:
2  *
3  * VIM - Vi IMproved	by Bram Moolenaar
4  *
5  * Do ":help uganda"  in Vim to read copying and usage conditions.
6  * Do ":help credits" in Vim to see a list of people who contributed.
7  * See README.txt for an overview of the Vim source code.
8  */
9 
10 /*
11  * misc1.c: functions that didn't seem to fit elsewhere
12  */
13 
14 #include "vim.h"
15 #include "version.h"
16 
17 #ifdef HAVE_FCNTL_H
18 # include <fcntl.h>		/* for chdir() */
19 #endif
20 
21 static char_u *vim_version_dir __ARGS((char_u *vimdir));
22 static char_u *remove_tail __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *name));
23 #if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
24 static char_u *remove_tail_with_ext __ARGS((char_u *p, char_u *pend, char_u *ext));
25 #endif
26 static int get_indent_str __ARGS((char_u *ptr, int ts));
27 static int copy_indent __ARGS((int size, char_u	*src));
28 
29 /*
30  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in the current line.
31  */
32     int
33 get_indent()
34 {
35     return get_indent_str(ml_get_curline(), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
36 }
37 
38 /*
39  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum".
40  */
41     int
42 get_indent_lnum(lnum)
43     linenr_T	lnum;
44 {
45     return get_indent_str(ml_get(lnum), (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
46 }
47 
48 #if defined(FEAT_FOLDING) || defined(PROTO)
49 /*
50  * Count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "lnum" of buffer
51  * "buf".
52  */
53     int
54 get_indent_buf(buf, lnum)
55     buf_T	*buf;
56     linenr_T	lnum;
57 {
58     return get_indent_str(ml_get_buf(buf, lnum, FALSE), (int)buf->b_p_ts);
59 }
60 #endif
61 
62 /*
63  * count the size (in window cells) of the indent in line "ptr", with
64  * 'tabstop' at "ts"
65  */
66     static int
67 get_indent_str(ptr, ts)
68     char_u	*ptr;
69     int		ts;
70 {
71     int		count = 0;
72 
73     for ( ; *ptr; ++ptr)
74     {
75 	if (*ptr == TAB)    /* count a tab for what it is worth */
76 	    count += ts - (count % ts);
77 	else if (*ptr == ' ')
78 	    ++count;		/* count a space for one */
79 	else
80 	    break;
81     }
82     return (count);
83 }
84 
85 /*
86  * Set the indent of the current line.
87  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
88  * Caller must take care of undo.
89  * "flags":
90  *	SIN_CHANGED:	call changed_bytes() if the line was changed.
91  *	SIN_INSERT:	insert the indent in front of the line.
92  *	SIN_UNDO:	save line for undo before changing it.
93  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
94  */
95     int
96 set_indent(size, flags)
97     int		size;
98     int		flags;
99 {
100     char_u	*p;
101     char_u	*newline;
102     char_u	*oldline;
103     char_u	*s;
104     int		todo;
105     int		ind_len;
106     int		line_len;
107     int		doit = FALSE;
108     int		ind_done;
109     int		tab_pad;
110 
111     /*
112      * First check if there is anything to do and compute the number of
113      * characters needed for the indent.
114      */
115     todo = size;
116     ind_len = 0;
117     p = oldline = ml_get_curline();
118 
119     /* Calculate the buffer size for the new indent, and check to see if it
120      * isn't already set */
121 
122     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
123     if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
124     {
125 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
126 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
127 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
128 	{
129 	    ind_done = 0;
130 
131 	    /* count as many characters as we can use */
132 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
133 	    {
134 		if (*p == TAB)
135 		{
136 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
137 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
138 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
139 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
140 			break;
141 		    todo -= tab_pad;
142 		    ++ind_len;
143 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
144 		}
145 		else
146 		{
147 		    --todo;
148 		    ++ind_len;
149 		    ++ind_done;
150 		}
151 		++p;
152 	    }
153 
154 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
155 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
156 	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
157 	    {
158 		doit = TRUE;
159 		todo -= tab_pad;
160 		++ind_len;
161 		/* ind_done += tab_pad; */
162 	    }
163 	}
164 
165 	/* count tabs required for indent */
166 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
167 	{
168 	    if (*p != TAB)
169 		doit = TRUE;
170 	    else
171 		++p;
172 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
173 	    ++ind_len;
174 	    /* ind_done += (int)curbuf->b_p_ts; */
175 	}
176     }
177     /* count spaces required for indent */
178     while (todo > 0)
179     {
180 	if (*p != ' ')
181 	    doit = TRUE;
182 	else
183 	    ++p;
184 	--todo;
185 	++ind_len;
186 	/* ++ind_done; */
187     }
188 
189     /* Return if the indent is OK already. */
190     if (!doit && !vim_iswhite(*p) && !(flags & SIN_INSERT))
191 	return FALSE;
192 
193     /* Allocate memory for the new line. */
194     if (flags & SIN_INSERT)
195 	p = oldline;
196     else
197 	p = skipwhite(p);
198     line_len = (int)STRLEN(p) + 1;
199     newline = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
200     if (newline == NULL)
201 	return FALSE;
202 
203     /* Put the characters in the new line. */
204     s = newline;
205     todo = size;
206     /* if 'expandtab' isn't set: use TABs */
207     if (!curbuf->b_p_et)
208     {
209 	/* If 'preserveindent' is set then reuse as much as possible of
210 	 * the existing indent structure for the new indent */
211 	if (!(flags & SIN_INSERT) && curbuf->b_p_pi)
212 	{
213 	    p = oldline;
214 	    ind_done = 0;
215 
216 	    while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*p))
217 	    {
218 		if (*p == TAB)
219 		{
220 		    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
221 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
222 		    /* stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
223 		    if (todo < tab_pad)
224 			break;
225 		    todo -= tab_pad;
226 		    ind_done += tab_pad;
227 		}
228 		else
229 		{
230 		    --todo;
231 		    ++ind_done;
232 		}
233 		*s++ = *p++;
234 	    }
235 
236 	    /* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
237 	    tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
238 	    if (todo >= tab_pad)
239 	    {
240 		*s++ = TAB;
241 		todo -= tab_pad;
242 	    }
243 
244 	    p = skipwhite(p);
245 	}
246 
247 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
248 	{
249 	    *s++ = TAB;
250 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
251 	}
252     }
253     while (todo > 0)
254     {
255 	*s++ = ' ';
256 	--todo;
257     }
258     mch_memmove(s, p, (size_t)line_len);
259 
260     /* Replace the line (unless undo fails). */
261     if (!(flags & SIN_UNDO) || u_savesub(curwin->w_cursor.lnum) == OK)
262     {
263 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, newline, FALSE);
264 	if (flags & SIN_CHANGED)
265 	    changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
266 	/* Correct saved cursor position if it's after the indent. */
267 	if (saved_cursor.lnum == curwin->w_cursor.lnum
268 				&& saved_cursor.col >= (colnr_T)(p - oldline))
269 	    saved_cursor.col += ind_len - (p - oldline);
270     }
271     else
272 	vim_free(newline);
273 
274     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
275     return TRUE;
276 }
277 
278 /*
279  * Copy the indent from ptr to the current line (and fill to size)
280  * Leaves the cursor on the first non-blank in the line.
281  * Returns TRUE if the line was changed.
282  */
283     static int
284 copy_indent(size, src)
285     int		size;
286     char_u	*src;
287 {
288     char_u	*p = NULL;
289     char_u	*line = NULL;
290     char_u	*s;
291     int		todo;
292     int		ind_len;
293     int		line_len = 0;
294     int		tab_pad;
295     int		ind_done;
296     int		round;
297 
298     /* Round 1: compute the number of characters needed for the indent
299      * Round 2: copy the characters. */
300     for (round = 1; round <= 2; ++round)
301     {
302 	todo = size;
303 	ind_len = 0;
304 	ind_done = 0;
305 	s = src;
306 
307 	/* Count/copy the usable portion of the source line */
308 	while (todo > 0 && vim_iswhite(*s))
309 	{
310 	    if (*s == TAB)
311 	    {
312 		tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts
313 					   - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
314 		/* Stop if this tab will overshoot the target */
315 		if (todo < tab_pad)
316 		    break;
317 		todo -= tab_pad;
318 		ind_done += tab_pad;
319 	    }
320 	    else
321 	    {
322 		--todo;
323 		++ind_done;
324 	    }
325 	    ++ind_len;
326 	    if (round == 2)
327 		*p++ = *s;
328 	    ++s;
329 	}
330 
331 	/* Fill to next tabstop with a tab, if possible */
332 	tab_pad = (int)curbuf->b_p_ts - (ind_done % (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
333 	if (todo >= tab_pad)
334 	{
335 	    todo -= tab_pad;
336 	    ++ind_len;
337 	    if (round == 2)
338 		*p++ = TAB;
339 	}
340 
341 	/* Add tabs required for indent */
342 	while (todo >= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts)
343 	{
344 	    todo -= (int)curbuf->b_p_ts;
345 	    ++ind_len;
346 	    if (round == 2)
347 		*p++ = TAB;
348 	}
349 
350 	/* Count/add spaces required for indent */
351 	while (todo > 0)
352 	{
353 	    --todo;
354 	    ++ind_len;
355 	    if (round == 2)
356 		*p++ = ' ';
357 	}
358 
359 	if (round == 1)
360 	{
361 	    /* Allocate memory for the result: the copied indent, new indent
362 	     * and the rest of the line. */
363 	    line_len = (int)STRLEN(ml_get_curline()) + 1;
364 	    line = alloc(ind_len + line_len);
365 	    if (line == NULL)
366 		return FALSE;
367 	    p = line;
368 	}
369     }
370 
371     /* Append the original line */
372     mch_memmove(p, ml_get_curline(), (size_t)line_len);
373 
374     /* Replace the line */
375     ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, line, FALSE);
376 
377     /* Put the cursor after the indent. */
378     curwin->w_cursor.col = ind_len;
379     return TRUE;
380 }
381 
382 /*
383  * Return the indent of the current line after a number.  Return -1 if no
384  * number was found.  Used for 'n' in 'formatoptions': numbered list.
385  */
386     int
387 get_number_indent(lnum)
388     linenr_T	lnum;
389 {
390     char_u	*line;
391     char_u	*p;
392     colnr_T	col;
393     pos_T	pos;
394 
395     if (lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
396 	return -1;
397     line = ml_get(lnum);
398     p = skipwhite(line);
399     if (!VIM_ISDIGIT(*p))
400 	return -1;
401     p = skipdigits(p);
402     if (vim_strchr((char_u *)":.)]}\t ", *p) == NULL)
403 	return -1;
404     p = skipwhite(p + 1);
405     if (*p == NUL)
406 	return -1;
407     pos.lnum = lnum;
408     pos.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
409     getvcol(curwin, &pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
410     return (int)col;
411 }
412 
413 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT)
414 
415 static int cin_is_cinword __ARGS((char_u *line));
416 
417 /*
418  * Return TRUE if the string "line" starts with a word from 'cinwords'.
419  */
420     static int
421 cin_is_cinword(line)
422     char_u	*line;
423 {
424     char_u	*cinw;
425     char_u	*cinw_buf;
426     int		cinw_len;
427     int		retval = FALSE;
428     int		len;
429 
430     cinw_len = (int)STRLEN(curbuf->b_p_cinw) + 1;
431     cinw_buf = alloc((unsigned)cinw_len);
432     if (cinw_buf != NULL)
433     {
434 	line = skipwhite(line);
435 	for (cinw = curbuf->b_p_cinw; *cinw; )
436 	{
437 	    len = copy_option_part(&cinw, cinw_buf, cinw_len, ",");
438 	    if (STRNCMP(line, cinw_buf, len) == 0
439 		    && (!vim_iswordc(line[len]) || !vim_iswordc(line[len - 1])))
440 	    {
441 		retval = TRUE;
442 		break;
443 	    }
444 	}
445 	vim_free(cinw_buf);
446     }
447     return retval;
448 }
449 #endif
450 
451 /*
452  * open_line: Add a new line below or above the current line.
453  *
454  * For VREPLACE mode, we only add a new line when we get to the end of the
455  * file, otherwise we just start replacing the next line.
456  *
457  * Caller must take care of undo.  Since VREPLACE may affect any number of
458  * lines however, it may call u_save_cursor() again when starting to change a
459  * new line.
460  * "flags": OPENLINE_DELSPACES	delete spaces after cursor
461  *	    OPENLINE_DO_COM	format comments
462  *	    OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL	keep trailing spaces
463  *	    OPENLINE_MARKFIX	adjust mark positions after the line break
464  *
465  * Return TRUE for success, FALSE for failure
466  */
467     int
468 open_line(dir, flags, old_indent)
469     int		dir;		/* FORWARD or BACKWARD */
470     int		flags;
471     int		old_indent;	/* indent for after ^^D in Insert mode */
472 {
473     char_u	*saved_line;		/* copy of the original line */
474     char_u	*next_line = NULL;	/* copy of the next line */
475     char_u	*p_extra = NULL;	/* what goes to next line */
476     int		less_cols = 0;		/* less columns for mark in new line */
477     int		less_cols_off = 0;	/* columns to skip for mark adjust */
478     pos_T	old_cursor;		/* old cursor position */
479     int		newcol = 0;		/* new cursor column */
480     int		newindent = 0;		/* auto-indent of the new line */
481     int		n;
482     int		trunc_line = FALSE;	/* truncate current line afterwards */
483     int		retval = FALSE;		/* return value, default is FAIL */
484 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
485     int		extra_len = 0;		/* length of p_extra string */
486     int		lead_len;		/* length of comment leader */
487     char_u	*lead_flags;	/* position in 'comments' for comment leader */
488     char_u	*leader = NULL;		/* copy of comment leader */
489 #endif
490     char_u	*allocated = NULL;	/* allocated memory */
491 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_LISP) \
492 	|| defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
493     char_u	*p;
494 #endif
495     int		saved_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
496 #if defined(FEAT_SMARTINDENT) || defined(FEAT_COMMENTS)
497     pos_T	*pos;
498 #endif
499 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
500     int		do_si = (!p_paste && curbuf->b_p_si
501 # ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
502 					&& !curbuf->b_p_cin
503 # endif
504 			);
505     int		no_si = FALSE;		/* reset did_si afterwards */
506     int		first_char = NUL;	/* init for GCC */
507 #endif
508 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
509     int		vreplace_mode;
510 #endif
511     int		did_append;		/* appended a new line */
512     int		saved_pi = curbuf->b_p_pi; /* copy of preserveindent setting */
513 
514     /*
515      * make a copy of the current line so we can mess with it
516      */
517     saved_line = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
518     if (saved_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
519 	return FALSE;
520 
521 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
522     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
523     {
524 	/*
525 	 * With VREPLACE we make a copy of the next line, which we will be
526 	 * starting to replace.  First make the new line empty and let vim play
527 	 * with the indenting and comment leader to its heart's content.  Then
528 	 * we grab what it ended up putting on the new line, put back the
529 	 * original line, and call ins_char() to put each new character onto
530 	 * the line, replacing what was there before and pushing the right
531 	 * stuff onto the replace stack.  -- webb.
532 	 */
533 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum < orig_line_count)
534 	    next_line = vim_strsave(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1));
535 	else
536 	    next_line = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
537 	if (next_line == NULL)	    /* out of memory! */
538 	    goto theend;
539 
540 	/*
541 	 * In VREPLACE mode, a NL replaces the rest of the line, and starts
542 	 * replacing the next line, so push all of the characters left on the
543 	 * line onto the replace stack.  We'll push any other characters that
544 	 * might be replaced at the start of the next line (due to autoindent
545 	 * etc) a bit later.
546 	 */
547 	replace_push(NUL);  /* Call twice because BS over NL expects it */
548 	replace_push(NUL);
549 	p = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
550 	while (*p != NUL)
551 	    replace_push(*p++);
552 	saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
553     }
554 #endif
555 
556     if ((State & INSERT)
557 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
558 	    && !(State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
559 #endif
560 	    )
561     {
562 	p_extra = saved_line + curwin->w_cursor.col;
563 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
564 	if (do_si)		/* need first char after new line break */
565 	{
566 	    p = skipwhite(p_extra);
567 	    first_char = *p;
568 	}
569 #endif
570 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
571 	extra_len = (int)STRLEN(p_extra);
572 #endif
573 	saved_char = *p_extra;
574 	*p_extra = NUL;
575     }
576 
577     u_clearline();		/* cannot do "U" command when adding lines */
578 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
579     did_si = FALSE;
580 #endif
581     ai_col = 0;
582 
583     /*
584      * If we just did an auto-indent, then we didn't type anything on
585      * the prior line, and it should be truncated.  Do this even if 'ai' is not
586      * set because automatically inserting a comment leader also sets did_ai.
587      */
588     if (dir == FORWARD && did_ai)
589 	trunc_line = TRUE;
590 
591     /*
592      * If 'autoindent' and/or 'smartindent' is set, try to figure out what
593      * indent to use for the new line.
594      */
595     if (curbuf->b_p_ai
596 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
597 			|| do_si
598 #endif
599 					    )
600     {
601 	/*
602 	 * count white space on current line
603 	 */
604 	newindent = get_indent_str(saved_line, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
605 	if (newindent == 0)
606 	    newindent = old_indent;	/* for ^^D command in insert mode */
607 
608 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
609 	/*
610 	 * Do smart indenting.
611 	 * In insert/replace mode (only when dir == FORWARD)
612 	 * we may move some text to the next line. If it starts with '{'
613 	 * don't add an indent. Fixes inserting a NL before '{' in line
614 	 *	"if (condition) {"
615 	 */
616 	if (!trunc_line && do_si && *saved_line != NUL
617 				    && (p_extra == NULL || first_char != '{'))
618 	{
619 	    char_u  *ptr;
620 	    char_u  last_char;
621 
622 	    old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
623 	    ptr = saved_line;
624 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
625 	    if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
626 		lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
627 	    else
628 		lead_len = 0;
629 # endif
630 	    if (dir == FORWARD)
631 	    {
632 		/*
633 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
634 		 * recognised as comments.
635 		 */
636 		if (
637 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
638 			lead_len == 0 &&
639 # endif
640 			ptr[0] == '#')
641 		{
642 		    while (ptr[0] == '#' && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
643 			ptr = ml_get(--curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
644 		    newindent = get_indent();
645 		}
646 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
647 		if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
648 		    lead_len = get_leader_len(ptr, NULL, FALSE);
649 		else
650 		    lead_len = 0;
651 		if (lead_len > 0)
652 		{
653 		    /*
654 		     * This case gets the following right:
655 		     *	    \*
656 		     *	     * A comment (read '\' as '/').
657 		     *	     *\
658 		     * #define IN_THE_WAY
659 		     *	    This should line up here;
660 		     */
661 		    p = skipwhite(ptr);
662 		    if (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '*')
663 			p++;
664 		    if (p[0] == '*')
665 		    {
666 			for (p++; *p; p++)
667 			{
668 			    if (p[0] == '/' && p[-1] == '*')
669 			    {
670 				/*
671 				 * End of C comment, indent should line up
672 				 * with the line containing the start of
673 				 * the comment
674 				 */
675 				curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
676 				if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
677 				{
678 				    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
679 				    newindent = get_indent();
680 				}
681 			    }
682 			}
683 		    }
684 		}
685 		else	/* Not a comment line */
686 # endif
687 		{
688 		    /* Find last non-blank in line */
689 		    p = ptr + STRLEN(ptr) - 1;
690 		    while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
691 			--p;
692 		    last_char = *p;
693 
694 		    /*
695 		     * find the character just before the '{' or ';'
696 		     */
697 		    if (last_char == '{' || last_char == ';')
698 		    {
699 			if (p > ptr)
700 			    --p;
701 			while (p > ptr && vim_iswhite(*p))
702 			    --p;
703 		    }
704 		    /*
705 		     * Try to catch lines that are split over multiple
706 		     * lines.  eg:
707 		     *	    if (condition &&
708 		     *			condition) {
709 		     *		Should line up here!
710 		     *	    }
711 		     */
712 		    if (*p == ')')
713 		    {
714 			curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(p - ptr);
715 			if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) != NULL)
716 			{
717 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
718 			    newindent = get_indent();
719 			    ptr = ml_get_curline();
720 			}
721 		    }
722 		    /*
723 		     * If last character is '{' do indent, without
724 		     * checking for "if" and the like.
725 		     */
726 		    if (last_char == '{')
727 		    {
728 			did_si = TRUE;	/* do indent */
729 			no_si = TRUE;	/* don't delete it when '{' typed */
730 		    }
731 		    /*
732 		     * Look for "if" and the like, use 'cinwords'.
733 		     * Don't do this if the previous line ended in ';' or
734 		     * '}'.
735 		     */
736 		    else if (last_char != ';' && last_char != '}'
737 						       && cin_is_cinword(ptr))
738 			did_si = TRUE;
739 		}
740 	    }
741 	    else /* dir == BACKWARD */
742 	    {
743 		/*
744 		 * Skip preprocessor directives, unless they are
745 		 * recognised as comments.
746 		 */
747 		if (
748 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
749 			lead_len == 0 &&
750 # endif
751 			ptr[0] == '#')
752 		{
753 		    int was_backslashed = FALSE;
754 
755 		    while ((ptr[0] == '#' || was_backslashed) &&
756 			 curwin->w_cursor.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
757 		    {
758 			if (*ptr && ptr[STRLEN(ptr) - 1] == '\\')
759 			    was_backslashed = TRUE;
760 			else
761 			    was_backslashed = FALSE;
762 			ptr = ml_get(++curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
763 		    }
764 		    if (was_backslashed)
765 			newindent = 0;	    /* Got to end of file */
766 		    else
767 			newindent = get_indent();
768 		}
769 		p = skipwhite(ptr);
770 		if (*p == '}')	    /* if line starts with '}': do indent */
771 		    did_si = TRUE;
772 		else		    /* can delete indent when '{' typed */
773 		    can_si_back = TRUE;
774 	    }
775 	    curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
776 	}
777 	if (do_si)
778 	    can_si = TRUE;
779 #endif /* FEAT_SMARTINDENT */
780 
781 	did_ai = TRUE;
782     }
783 
784 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
785     /*
786      * Find out if the current line starts with a comment leader.
787      * This may then be inserted in front of the new line.
788      */
789     end_comment_pending = NUL;
790     if (flags & OPENLINE_DO_COM)
791 	lead_len = get_leader_len(saved_line, &lead_flags, dir == BACKWARD);
792     else
793 	lead_len = 0;
794     if (lead_len > 0)
795     {
796 	char_u	*lead_repl = NULL;	    /* replaces comment leader */
797 	int	lead_repl_len = 0;	    /* length of *lead_repl */
798 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];   /* middle-comment string */
799 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];	    /* end-comment string */
800 	char_u	*comment_end = NULL;	    /* where lead_end has been found */
801 	int	extra_space = FALSE;	    /* append extra space */
802 	int	current_flag;
803 	int	require_blank = FALSE;	    /* requires blank after middle */
804 	char_u	*p2;
805 
806 	/*
807 	 * If the comment leader has the start, middle or end flag, it may not
808 	 * be used or may be replaced with the middle leader.
809 	 */
810 	for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
811 	{
812 	    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
813 	    {
814 		require_blank = TRUE;
815 		continue;
816 	    }
817 	    if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
818 	    {
819 		current_flag = *p;
820 		if (*p == COM_START)
821 		{
822 		    /*
823 		     * Doing "O" on a start of comment does not insert leader.
824 		     */
825 		    if (dir == BACKWARD)
826 		    {
827 			lead_len = 0;
828 			break;
829 		    }
830 
831 		    /* find start of middle part */
832 		    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
833 		    require_blank = FALSE;
834 		}
835 
836 		/*
837 		 * Isolate the strings of the middle and end leader.
838 		 */
839 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of middle flags */
840 		{
841 		    if (*p == COM_BLANK)
842 			require_blank = TRUE;
843 		    ++p;
844 		}
845 		(void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_middle, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
846 
847 		while (*p && p[-1] != ':')	/* find end of end flags */
848 		{
849 		    /* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
850 		    if (*p == COM_AUTO_END)
851 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
852 		    ++p;
853 		}
854 		n = copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
855 
856 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)	/* we can set it now */
857 		    end_comment_pending = lead_end[n - 1];
858 
859 		/*
860 		 * If the end of the comment is in the same line, don't use
861 		 * the comment leader.
862 		 */
863 		if (dir == FORWARD)
864 		{
865 		    for (p = saved_line + lead_len; *p; ++p)
866 			if (STRNCMP(p, lead_end, n) == 0)
867 			{
868 			    comment_end = p;
869 			    lead_len = 0;
870 			    break;
871 			}
872 		}
873 
874 		/*
875 		 * Doing "o" on a start of comment inserts the middle leader.
876 		 */
877 		if (lead_len > 0)
878 		{
879 		    if (current_flag == COM_START)
880 		    {
881 			lead_repl = lead_middle;
882 			lead_repl_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
883 		    }
884 
885 		    /*
886 		     * If we have hit RETURN immediately after the start
887 		     * comment leader, then put a space after the middle
888 		     * comment leader on the next line.
889 		     */
890 		    if (!vim_iswhite(saved_line[lead_len - 1])
891 			    && ((p_extra != NULL
892 				    && (int)curwin->w_cursor.col == lead_len)
893 				|| (p_extra == NULL
894 				    && saved_line[lead_len] == NUL)
895 				|| require_blank))
896 			extra_space = TRUE;
897 		}
898 		break;
899 	    }
900 	    if (*p == COM_END)
901 	    {
902 		/*
903 		 * Doing "o" on the end of a comment does not insert leader.
904 		 * Remember where the end is, might want to use it to find the
905 		 * start (for C-comments).
906 		 */
907 		if (dir == FORWARD)
908 		{
909 		    comment_end = skipwhite(saved_line);
910 		    lead_len = 0;
911 		    break;
912 		}
913 
914 		/*
915 		 * Doing "O" on the end of a comment inserts the middle leader.
916 		 * Find the string for the middle leader, searching backwards.
917 		 */
918 		while (p > curbuf->b_p_com && *p != ',')
919 		    --p;
920 		for (lead_repl = p; lead_repl > curbuf->b_p_com
921 					 && lead_repl[-1] != ':'; --lead_repl)
922 		    ;
923 		lead_repl_len = (int)(p - lead_repl);
924 
925 		/* We can probably always add an extra space when doing "O" on
926 		 * the comment-end */
927 		extra_space = TRUE;
928 
929 		/* Check whether we allow automatic ending of comments */
930 		for (p2 = p; *p2 && *p2 != ':'; p2++)
931 		{
932 		    if (*p2 == COM_AUTO_END)
933 			end_comment_pending = -1; /* means we want to set it */
934 		}
935 		if (end_comment_pending == -1)
936 		{
937 		    /* Find last character in end-comment string */
938 		    while (*p2 && *p2 != ',')
939 			p2++;
940 		    end_comment_pending = p2[-1];
941 		}
942 		break;
943 	    }
944 	    if (*p == COM_FIRST)
945 	    {
946 		/*
947 		 * Comment leader for first line only:	Don't repeat leader
948 		 * when using "O", blank out leader when using "o".
949 		 */
950 		if (dir == BACKWARD)
951 		    lead_len = 0;
952 		else
953 		{
954 		    lead_repl = (char_u *)"";
955 		    lead_repl_len = 0;
956 		}
957 		break;
958 	    }
959 	}
960 	if (lead_len)
961 	{
962 	    /* allocate buffer (may concatenate p_exta later) */
963 	    leader = alloc(lead_len + lead_repl_len + extra_space +
964 							      extra_len + 1);
965 	    allocated = leader;		    /* remember to free it later */
966 
967 	    if (leader == NULL)
968 		lead_len = 0;
969 	    else
970 	    {
971 		STRNCPY(leader, saved_line, lead_len);
972 		leader[lead_len] = NUL;
973 
974 		/*
975 		 * Replace leader with lead_repl, right or left adjusted
976 		 */
977 		if (lead_repl != NULL)
978 		{
979 		    int		c = 0;
980 		    int		off = 0;
981 
982 		    for (p = lead_flags; *p && *p != ':'; ++p)
983 		    {
984 			if (*p == COM_RIGHT || *p == COM_LEFT)
985 			    c = *p;
986 			else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
987 			    off = getdigits(&p);
988 		    }
989 		    if (c == COM_RIGHT)    /* right adjusted leader */
990 		    {
991 			/* find last non-white in the leader to line up with */
992 			for (p = leader + lead_len - 1; p > leader
993 						      && vim_iswhite(*p); --p)
994 			    ;
995 			++p;
996 
997 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
998 			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
999 			 * screen characters, not bytes. */
1000 			{
1001 			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1002 							       lead_repl_len);
1003 			    int	    old_size = 0;
1004 			    char_u  *endp = p;
1005 			    int	    l;
1006 
1007 			    while (old_size < repl_size && p > leader)
1008 			    {
1009 				--p;
1010 				p -= mb_head_off(leader, p);
1011 				old_size += ptr2cells(p);
1012 			    }
1013 			    l = lead_repl_len - (endp - p);
1014 			    if (l != 0)
1015 				mch_memmove(endp + l, endp,
1016 					(size_t)((leader + lead_len) - endp));
1017 			    lead_len += l;
1018 			}
1019 #else
1020 			if (p < leader + lead_repl_len)
1021 			    p = leader;
1022 			else
1023 			    p -= lead_repl_len;
1024 #endif
1025 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1026 			if (p + lead_repl_len > leader + lead_len)
1027 			    p[lead_repl_len] = NUL;
1028 
1029 			/* blank-out any other chars from the old leader. */
1030 			while (--p >= leader)
1031 			{
1032 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1033 			    int l = mb_head_off(leader, p);
1034 
1035 			    if (l > 1)
1036 			    {
1037 				p -= l;
1038 				if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1039 				{
1040 				    p[1] = ' ';
1041 				    --l;
1042 				}
1043 				mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l + 1,
1044 				   (size_t)((leader + lead_len) - (p + l + 1)));
1045 				lead_len -= l;
1046 				*p = ' ';
1047 			    }
1048 			    else
1049 #endif
1050 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1051 				*p = ' ';
1052 			}
1053 		    }
1054 		    else		    /* left adjusted leader */
1055 		    {
1056 			p = skipwhite(leader);
1057 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1058 			/* Compute the length of the replaced characters in
1059 			 * screen characters, not bytes. Move the part that is
1060 			 * not to be overwritten. */
1061 			{
1062 			    int	    repl_size = vim_strnsize(lead_repl,
1063 							       lead_repl_len);
1064 			    int	    i;
1065 			    int	    l;
1066 
1067 			    for (i = 0; p[i] != NUL && i < lead_len; i += l)
1068 			    {
1069 				l = mb_ptr2len_check(p + i);
1070 				if (vim_strnsize(p, i + l) > repl_size)
1071 				    break;
1072 			    }
1073 			    if (i != lead_repl_len)
1074 			    {
1075 				mch_memmove(p + lead_repl_len, p + i,
1076 				       (size_t)(lead_len - i - (leader - p)));
1077 				lead_len += lead_repl_len - i;
1078 			    }
1079 			}
1080 #endif
1081 			mch_memmove(p, lead_repl, (size_t)lead_repl_len);
1082 
1083 			/* Replace any remaining non-white chars in the old
1084 			 * leader by spaces.  Keep Tabs, the indent must
1085 			 * remain the same. */
1086 			for (p += lead_repl_len; p < leader + lead_len; ++p)
1087 			    if (!vim_iswhite(*p))
1088 			    {
1089 				/* Don't put a space before a TAB. */
1090 				if (p + 1 < leader + lead_len && p[1] == TAB)
1091 				{
1092 				    --lead_len;
1093 				    mch_memmove(p, p + 1,
1094 						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1095 				}
1096 				else
1097 				{
1098 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1099 				    int	    l = mb_ptr2len_check(p);
1100 
1101 				    if (l > 1)
1102 				    {
1103 					if (ptr2cells(p) > 1)
1104 					{
1105 					    /* Replace a double-wide char with
1106 					     * two spaces */
1107 					    --l;
1108 					    *p++ = ' ';
1109 					}
1110 					mch_memmove(p + 1, p + l,
1111 						     (leader + lead_len) - p);
1112 					lead_len -= l - 1;
1113 				    }
1114 #endif
1115 				    *p = ' ';
1116 				}
1117 			    }
1118 			*p = NUL;
1119 		    }
1120 
1121 		    /* Recompute the indent, it may have changed. */
1122 		    if (curbuf->b_p_ai
1123 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1124 					|| do_si
1125 #endif
1126 							   )
1127 			newindent = get_indent_str(leader, (int)curbuf->b_p_ts);
1128 
1129 		    /* Add the indent offset */
1130 		    if (newindent + off < 0)
1131 		    {
1132 			off = -newindent;
1133 			newindent = 0;
1134 		    }
1135 		    else
1136 			newindent += off;
1137 
1138 		    /* Correct trailing spaces for the shift, so that
1139 		     * alignment remains equal. */
1140 		    while (off > 0 && lead_len > 0
1141 					       && leader[lead_len - 1] == ' ')
1142 		    {
1143 			/* Don't do it when there is a tab before the space */
1144 			if (vim_strchr(skipwhite(leader), '\t') != NULL)
1145 			    break;
1146 			--lead_len;
1147 			--off;
1148 		    }
1149 
1150 		    /* If the leader ends in white space, don't add an
1151 		     * extra space */
1152 		    if (lead_len > 0 && vim_iswhite(leader[lead_len - 1]))
1153 			extra_space = FALSE;
1154 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1155 		}
1156 
1157 		if (extra_space)
1158 		{
1159 		    leader[lead_len++] = ' ';
1160 		    leader[lead_len] = NUL;
1161 		}
1162 
1163 		newcol = lead_len;
1164 
1165 		/*
1166 		 * if a new indent will be set below, remove the indent that
1167 		 * is in the comment leader
1168 		 */
1169 		if (newindent
1170 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1171 				|| did_si
1172 #endif
1173 					   )
1174 		{
1175 		    while (lead_len && vim_iswhite(*leader))
1176 		    {
1177 			--lead_len;
1178 			--newcol;
1179 			++leader;
1180 		    }
1181 		}
1182 
1183 	    }
1184 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1185 	    did_si = can_si = FALSE;
1186 #endif
1187 	}
1188 	else if (comment_end != NULL)
1189 	{
1190 	    /*
1191 	     * We have finished a comment, so we don't use the leader.
1192 	     * If this was a C-comment and 'ai' or 'si' is set do a normal
1193 	     * indent to align with the line containing the start of the
1194 	     * comment.
1195 	     */
1196 	    if (comment_end[0] == '*' && comment_end[1] == '/' &&
1197 			(curbuf->b_p_ai
1198 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1199 					|| do_si
1200 #endif
1201 							   ))
1202 	    {
1203 		old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1204 		curwin->w_cursor.col = (colnr_T)(comment_end - saved_line);
1205 		if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, NUL)) != NULL)
1206 		{
1207 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
1208 		    newindent = get_indent();
1209 		}
1210 		curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1211 	    }
1212 	}
1213     }
1214 #endif
1215 
1216     /* (State == INSERT || State == REPLACE), only when dir == FORWARD */
1217     if (p_extra != NULL)
1218     {
1219 	*p_extra = saved_char;		/* restore char that NUL replaced */
1220 
1221 	/*
1222 	 * When 'ai' set or "flags" has OPENLINE_DELSPACES, skip to the first
1223 	 * non-blank.
1224 	 *
1225 	 * When in REPLACE mode, put the deleted blanks on the replace stack,
1226 	 * preceded by a NUL, so they can be put back when a BS is entered.
1227 	 */
1228 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1229 	    replace_push(NUL);	    /* end of extra blanks */
1230 	if (curbuf->b_p_ai || (flags & OPENLINE_DELSPACES))
1231 	{
1232 	    while ((*p_extra == ' ' || *p_extra == '\t')
1233 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1234 		    && (!enc_utf8
1235 			       || !utf_iscomposing(utf_ptr2char(p_extra + 1)))
1236 #endif
1237 		    )
1238 	    {
1239 		if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1240 		    replace_push(*p_extra);
1241 		++p_extra;
1242 		++less_cols_off;
1243 	    }
1244 	}
1245 	if (*p_extra != NUL)
1246 	    did_ai = FALSE;	    /* append some text, don't truncate now */
1247 
1248 	/* columns for marks adjusted for removed columns */
1249 	less_cols = (int)(p_extra - saved_line);
1250     }
1251 
1252     if (p_extra == NULL)
1253 	p_extra = (char_u *)"";		    /* append empty line */
1254 
1255 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1256     /* concatenate leader and p_extra, if there is a leader */
1257     if (lead_len)
1258     {
1259 	STRCAT(leader, p_extra);
1260 	p_extra = leader;
1261 	did_ai = TRUE;	    /* So truncating blanks works with comments */
1262 	less_cols -= lead_len;
1263     }
1264     else
1265 	end_comment_pending = NUL;  /* turns out there was no leader */
1266 #endif
1267 
1268     old_cursor = curwin->w_cursor;
1269     if (dir == BACKWARD)
1270 	--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1271 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1272     if (!(State & VREPLACE_FLAG) || old_cursor.lnum >= orig_line_count)
1273 #endif
1274     {
1275 	if (ml_append(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, (colnr_T)0, FALSE)
1276 								      == FAIL)
1277 	    goto theend;
1278 	/* Postpone calling changed_lines(), because it would mess up folding
1279 	 * with markers. */
1280 	mark_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, 1L, 0L);
1281 	did_append = TRUE;
1282     }
1283 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1284     else
1285     {
1286 	/*
1287 	 * In VREPLACE mode we are starting to replace the next line.
1288 	 */
1289 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum++;
1290 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= Insstart.lnum + vr_lines_changed)
1291 	{
1292 	    /* In case we NL to a new line, BS to the previous one, and NL
1293 	     * again, we don't want to save the new line for undo twice.
1294 	     */
1295 	    (void)u_save_cursor();		    /* errors are ignored! */
1296 	    vr_lines_changed++;
1297 	}
1298 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, p_extra, TRUE);
1299 	changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0);
1300 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
1301 	did_append = FALSE;
1302     }
1303 #endif
1304 
1305     if (newindent
1306 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1307 		    || did_si
1308 #endif
1309 				)
1310     {
1311 	++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1312 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1313 	if (did_si)
1314 	{
1315 	    if (p_sr)
1316 		newindent -= newindent % (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1317 	    newindent += (int)curbuf->b_p_sw;
1318 	}
1319 #endif
1320 	/* Copy the indent only if expand tab is disabled */
1321 	if (curbuf->b_p_ci && !curbuf->b_p_et)
1322 	{
1323 	    (void)copy_indent(newindent, saved_line);
1324 
1325 	    /*
1326 	     * Set the 'preserveindent' option so that any further screwing
1327 	     * with the line doesn't entirely destroy our efforts to preserve
1328 	     * it.  It gets restored at the function end.
1329 	     */
1330 	    curbuf->b_p_pi = TRUE;
1331 	}
1332 	else
1333 	    (void)set_indent(newindent, SIN_INSERT);
1334 	less_cols -= curwin->w_cursor.col;
1335 
1336 	ai_col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1337 
1338 	/*
1339 	 * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the new indent, there must
1340 	 * be a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS
1341 	 */
1342 	if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1343 	    for (n = 0; n < (int)curwin->w_cursor.col; ++n)
1344 		replace_push(NUL);
1345 	newcol += curwin->w_cursor.col;
1346 #ifdef FEAT_SMARTINDENT
1347 	if (no_si)
1348 	    did_si = FALSE;
1349 #endif
1350     }
1351 
1352 #ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1353     /*
1354      * In REPLACE mode, for each character in the extra leader, there must be
1355      * a NUL on the replace stack, for when it is deleted with BS.
1356      */
1357     if (REPLACE_NORMAL(State))
1358 	while (lead_len-- > 0)
1359 	    replace_push(NUL);
1360 #endif
1361 
1362     curwin->w_cursor = old_cursor;
1363 
1364     if (dir == FORWARD)
1365     {
1366 	if (trunc_line || (State & INSERT))
1367 	{
1368 	    /* truncate current line at cursor */
1369 	    saved_line[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
1370 	    /* Remove trailing white space, unless OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL used. */
1371 	    if (trunc_line && !(flags & OPENLINE_KEEPTRAIL))
1372 		truncate_spaces(saved_line);
1373 	    ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, saved_line, FALSE);
1374 	    saved_line = NULL;
1375 	    if (did_append)
1376 	    {
1377 		changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col,
1378 					       curwin->w_cursor.lnum + 1, 1L);
1379 		did_append = FALSE;
1380 
1381 		/* Move marks after the line break to the new line. */
1382 		if (flags & OPENLINE_MARKFIX)
1383 		    mark_col_adjust(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
1384 					 curwin->w_cursor.col + less_cols_off,
1385 							1L, (long)-less_cols);
1386 	    }
1387 	    else
1388 		changed_bytes(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
1389 	}
1390 
1391 	/*
1392 	 * Put the cursor on the new line.  Careful: the scrollup() above may
1393 	 * have moved w_cursor, we must use old_cursor.
1394 	 */
1395 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = old_cursor.lnum + 1;
1396     }
1397     if (did_append)
1398 	changed_lines(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 0, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, 1L);
1399 
1400     curwin->w_cursor.col = newcol;
1401 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1402     curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1403 #endif
1404 
1405 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1406     /*
1407      * In VREPLACE mode, we are handling the replace stack ourselves, so stop
1408      * fixthisline() from doing it (via change_indent()) by telling it we're in
1409      * normal INSERT mode.
1410      */
1411     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1412     {
1413 	vreplace_mode = State;	/* So we know to put things right later */
1414 	State = INSERT;
1415     }
1416     else
1417 	vreplace_mode = 0;
1418 #endif
1419 #ifdef FEAT_LISP
1420     /*
1421      * May do lisp indenting.
1422      */
1423     if (!p_paste
1424 # ifdef FEAT_COMMENTS
1425 	    && leader == NULL
1426 # endif
1427 	    && curbuf->b_p_lisp
1428 	    && curbuf->b_p_ai)
1429     {
1430 	fixthisline(get_lisp_indent);
1431 	p = ml_get_curline();
1432 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1433     }
1434 #endif
1435 #ifdef FEAT_CINDENT
1436     /*
1437      * May do indenting after opening a new line.
1438      */
1439     if (!p_paste
1440 	    && (curbuf->b_p_cin
1441 #  ifdef FEAT_EVAL
1442 		    || *curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL
1443 #  endif
1444 		)
1445 	    && in_cinkeys(dir == FORWARD
1446 		? KEY_OPEN_FORW
1447 		: KEY_OPEN_BACK, ' ', linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum)))
1448     {
1449 	do_c_expr_indent();
1450 	p = ml_get_curline();
1451 	ai_col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(p) - p);
1452     }
1453 #endif
1454 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) && (defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(FEAT_CINDENT))
1455     if (vreplace_mode != 0)
1456 	State = vreplace_mode;
1457 #endif
1458 
1459 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1460     /*
1461      * Finally, VREPLACE gets the stuff on the new line, then puts back the
1462      * original line, and inserts the new stuff char by char, pushing old stuff
1463      * onto the replace stack (via ins_char()).
1464      */
1465     if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1466     {
1467 	/* Put new line in p_extra */
1468 	p_extra = vim_strsave(ml_get_curline());
1469 	if (p_extra == NULL)
1470 	    goto theend;
1471 
1472 	/* Put back original line */
1473 	ml_replace(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, next_line, FALSE);
1474 
1475 	/* Insert new stuff into line again */
1476 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
1477 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1478 	curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
1479 #endif
1480 	ins_bytes(p_extra);	/* will call changed_bytes() */
1481 	vim_free(p_extra);
1482 	next_line = NULL;
1483     }
1484 #endif
1485 
1486     retval = TRUE;		/* success! */
1487 theend:
1488     curbuf->b_p_pi = saved_pi;
1489     vim_free(saved_line);
1490     vim_free(next_line);
1491     vim_free(allocated);
1492     return retval;
1493 }
1494 
1495 #if defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(PROTO)
1496 /*
1497  * get_leader_len() returns the length of the prefix of the given string
1498  * which introduces a comment.	If this string is not a comment then 0 is
1499  * returned.
1500  * When "flags" is not NULL, it is set to point to the flags of the recognized
1501  * comment leader.
1502  * "backward" must be true for the "O" command.
1503  */
1504     int
1505 get_leader_len(line, flags, backward)
1506     char_u	*line;
1507     char_u	**flags;
1508     int		backward;
1509 {
1510     int		i, j;
1511     int		got_com = FALSE;
1512     int		found_one;
1513     char_u	part_buf[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* buffer for one option part */
1514     char_u	*string;		/* pointer to comment string */
1515     char_u	*list;
1516 
1517     i = 0;
1518     while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))    /* leading white space is ignored */
1519 	++i;
1520 
1521     /*
1522      * Repeat to match several nested comment strings.
1523      */
1524     while (line[i])
1525     {
1526 	/*
1527 	 * scan through the 'comments' option for a match
1528 	 */
1529 	found_one = FALSE;
1530 	for (list = curbuf->b_p_com; *list; )
1531 	{
1532 	    /*
1533 	     * Get one option part into part_buf[].  Advance list to next one.
1534 	     * put string at start of string.
1535 	     */
1536 	    if (!got_com && flags != NULL)  /* remember where flags started */
1537 		*flags = list;
1538 	    (void)copy_option_part(&list, part_buf, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
1539 	    string = vim_strchr(part_buf, ':');
1540 	    if (string == NULL)	    /* missing ':', ignore this part */
1541 		continue;
1542 	    *string++ = NUL;	    /* isolate flags from string */
1543 
1544 	    /*
1545 	     * When already found a nested comment, only accept further
1546 	     * nested comments.
1547 	     */
1548 	    if (got_com && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1549 		continue;
1550 
1551 	    /* When 'O' flag used don't use for "O" command */
1552 	    if (backward && vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NOBACK) != NULL)
1553 		continue;
1554 
1555 	    /*
1556 	     * Line contents and string must match.
1557 	     * When string starts with white space, must have some white space
1558 	     * (but the amount does not need to match, there might be a mix of
1559 	     * TABs and spaces).
1560 	     */
1561 	    if (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1562 	    {
1563 		if (i == 0 || !vim_iswhite(line[i - 1]))
1564 		    continue;
1565 		while (vim_iswhite(string[0]))
1566 		    ++string;
1567 	    }
1568 	    for (j = 0; string[j] != NUL && string[j] == line[i + j]; ++j)
1569 		;
1570 	    if (string[j] != NUL)
1571 		continue;
1572 
1573 	    /*
1574 	     * When 'b' flag used, there must be white space or an
1575 	     * end-of-line after the string in the line.
1576 	     */
1577 	    if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_BLANK) != NULL
1578 			   && !vim_iswhite(line[i + j]) && line[i + j] != NUL)
1579 		continue;
1580 
1581 	    /*
1582 	     * We have found a match, stop searching.
1583 	     */
1584 	    i += j;
1585 	    got_com = TRUE;
1586 	    found_one = TRUE;
1587 	    break;
1588 	}
1589 
1590 	/*
1591 	 * No match found, stop scanning.
1592 	 */
1593 	if (!found_one)
1594 	    break;
1595 
1596 	/*
1597 	 * Include any trailing white space.
1598 	 */
1599 	while (vim_iswhite(line[i]))
1600 	    ++i;
1601 
1602 	/*
1603 	 * If this comment doesn't nest, stop here.
1604 	 */
1605 	if (vim_strchr(part_buf, COM_NEST) == NULL)
1606 	    break;
1607     }
1608     return (got_com ? i : 0);
1609 }
1610 #endif
1611 
1612 /*
1613  * Return the number of window lines occupied by buffer line "lnum".
1614  */
1615     int
1616 plines(lnum)
1617     linenr_T	lnum;
1618 {
1619     return plines_win(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1620 }
1621 
1622     int
1623 plines_win(wp, lnum, winheight)
1624     win_T	*wp;
1625     linenr_T	lnum;
1626     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1627 {
1628 #if defined(FEAT_DIFF) || defined(PROTO)
1629     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1630      * is one line anyway. */
1631     return plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight) + diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1632 }
1633 
1634     int
1635 plines_nofill(lnum)
1636     linenr_T	lnum;
1637 {
1638     return plines_win_nofill(curwin, lnum, TRUE);
1639 }
1640 
1641     int
1642 plines_win_nofill(wp, lnum, winheight)
1643     win_T	*wp;
1644     linenr_T	lnum;
1645     int		winheight;	/* when TRUE limit to window height */
1646 {
1647 #endif
1648     int		lines;
1649 
1650     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1651 	return 1;
1652 
1653 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1654     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1655 	return 1;
1656 #endif
1657 
1658 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1659     /* A folded lines is handled just like an empty line. */
1660     /* NOTE: Caller must handle lines that are MAYBE folded. */
1661     if (lineFolded(wp, lnum) == TRUE)
1662 	return 1;
1663 #endif
1664 
1665     lines = plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum);
1666     if (winheight > 0 && lines > wp->w_height)
1667 	return (int)wp->w_height;
1668     return lines;
1669 }
1670 
1671 /*
1672  * Return number of window lines physical line "lnum" will occupy in window
1673  * "wp".  Does not care about folding, 'wrap' or 'diff'.
1674  */
1675     int
1676 plines_win_nofold(wp, lnum)
1677     win_T	*wp;
1678     linenr_T	lnum;
1679 {
1680     char_u	*s;
1681     long	col;
1682     int		width;
1683 
1684     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1685     if (*s == NUL)		/* empty line */
1686 	return 1;
1687     col = win_linetabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)MAXCOL);
1688 
1689     /*
1690      * If list mode is on, then the '$' at the end of the line may take up one
1691      * extra column.
1692      */
1693     if (wp->w_p_list && lcs_eol != NUL)
1694 	col += 1;
1695 
1696     /*
1697      * Add column offset for 'number' and 'foldcolumn'.
1698      */
1699     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1700     if (width <= 0)
1701 	return 32000;
1702     if (col <= width)
1703 	return 1;
1704     col -= width;
1705     width += win_col_off2(wp);
1706     return (col + (width - 1)) / width + 1;
1707 }
1708 
1709 /*
1710  * Like plines_win(), but only reports the number of physical screen lines
1711  * used from the start of the line to the given column number.
1712  */
1713     int
1714 plines_win_col(wp, lnum, column)
1715     win_T	*wp;
1716     linenr_T	lnum;
1717     long	column;
1718 {
1719     long	col;
1720     char_u	*s;
1721     int		lines = 0;
1722     int		width;
1723 
1724 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1725     /* Check for filler lines above this buffer line.  When folded the result
1726      * is one line anyway. */
1727     lines = diff_check_fill(wp, lnum);
1728 #endif
1729 
1730     if (!wp->w_p_wrap)
1731 	return lines + 1;
1732 
1733 #ifdef FEAT_VERTSPLIT
1734     if (wp->w_width == 0)
1735 	return lines + 1;
1736 #endif
1737 
1738     s = ml_get_buf(wp->w_buffer, lnum, FALSE);
1739 
1740     col = 0;
1741     while (*s != NUL && --column >= 0)
1742     {
1743 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL);
1744 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1745 	if (has_mbyte)
1746 	    s += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(s);
1747 	else
1748 #endif
1749 	    ++s;
1750     }
1751 
1752     /*
1753      * If *s is a TAB, and the TAB is not displayed as ^I, and we're not in
1754      * INSERT mode, then col must be adjusted so that it represents the last
1755      * screen position of the TAB.  This only fixes an error when the TAB wraps
1756      * from one screen line to the next (when 'columns' is not a multiple of
1757      * 'ts') -- webb.
1758      */
1759     if (*s == TAB && (State & NORMAL) && (!wp->w_p_list || lcs_tab1))
1760 	col += win_lbr_chartabsize(wp, s, (colnr_T)col, NULL) - 1;
1761 
1762     /*
1763      * Add column offset for 'number', 'foldcolumn', etc.
1764      */
1765     width = W_WIDTH(wp) - win_col_off(wp);
1766     if (width > 0)
1767     {
1768 	lines += 1;
1769 	if (col >= width)
1770 	    lines += (col - width) / (width + win_col_off2(wp));
1771 	if (lines <= wp->w_height)
1772 	    return lines;
1773     }
1774     return (int)(wp->w_height);	    /* maximum length */
1775 }
1776 
1777     int
1778 plines_m_win(wp, first, last)
1779     win_T	*wp;
1780     linenr_T	first, last;
1781 {
1782     int		count = 0;
1783 
1784     while (first <= last)
1785     {
1786 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
1787 	int	x;
1788 
1789 	/* Check if there are any really folded lines, but also included lines
1790 	 * that are maybe folded. */
1791 	x = foldedCount(wp, first, NULL);
1792 	if (x > 0)
1793 	{
1794 	    ++count;	    /* count 1 for "+-- folded" line */
1795 	    first += x;
1796 	}
1797 	else
1798 #endif
1799 	{
1800 #ifdef FEAT_DIFF
1801 	    if (first == wp->w_topline)
1802 		count += plines_win_nofill(wp, first, TRUE) + wp->w_topfill;
1803 	    else
1804 #endif
1805 		count += plines_win(wp, first, TRUE);
1806 	    ++first;
1807 	}
1808     }
1809     return (count);
1810 }
1811 
1812 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) || defined(PROTO)
1813 /*
1814  * Insert string "p" at the cursor position.  Stops at a NUL byte.
1815  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1816  */
1817     void
1818 ins_bytes(p)
1819     char_u	*p;
1820 {
1821     ins_bytes_len(p, (int)STRLEN(p));
1822 }
1823 #endif
1824 
1825 #if defined(FEAT_VREPLACE) || defined(FEAT_INS_EXPAND) \
1826 	|| defined(FEAT_COMMENTS) || defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1827 /*
1828  * Insert string "p" with length "len" at the cursor position.
1829  * Handles Replace mode and multi-byte characters.
1830  */
1831     void
1832 ins_bytes_len(p, len)
1833     char_u	*p;
1834     int		len;
1835 {
1836     int		i;
1837 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1838     int		n;
1839 
1840     for (i = 0; i < len; i += n)
1841     {
1842 	n = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p + i);
1843 	ins_char_bytes(p + i, n);
1844     }
1845 # else
1846     for (i = 0; i < len; ++i)
1847 	ins_char(p[i]);
1848 # endif
1849 }
1850 #endif
1851 
1852 /*
1853  * Insert or replace a single character at the cursor position.
1854  * When in REPLACE or VREPLACE mode, replace any existing character.
1855  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
1856  * For multi-byte characters we get the whole character, the caller must
1857  * convert bytes to a character.
1858  */
1859     void
1860 ins_char(c)
1861     int		c;
1862 {
1863 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
1864     char_u	buf[MB_MAXBYTES];
1865     int		n;
1866 
1867     n = (*mb_char2bytes)(c, buf);
1868 
1869     /* When "c" is 0x100, 0x200, etc. we don't want to insert a NUL byte.
1870      * Happens for CTRL-Vu9900. */
1871     if (buf[0] == 0)
1872 	buf[0] = '\n';
1873 
1874     ins_char_bytes(buf, n);
1875 }
1876 
1877     void
1878 ins_char_bytes(buf, charlen)
1879     char_u	*buf;
1880     int		charlen;
1881 {
1882     int		c = buf[0];
1883     int		l, j;
1884 #endif
1885     int		newlen;		/* nr of bytes inserted */
1886     int		oldlen;		/* nr of bytes deleted (0 when not replacing) */
1887     char_u	*p;
1888     char_u	*newp;
1889     char_u	*oldp;
1890     int		linelen;	/* length of old line including NUL */
1891     colnr_T	col;
1892     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
1893     int		i;
1894 
1895 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
1896     /* Break tabs if needed. */
1897     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
1898 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
1899 #endif
1900 
1901     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
1902     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
1903     linelen = (int)STRLEN(oldp) + 1;
1904 
1905     /* The lengths default to the values for when not replacing. */
1906     oldlen = 0;
1907 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1908     newlen = charlen;
1909 #else
1910     newlen = 1;
1911 #endif
1912 
1913     if (State & REPLACE_FLAG)
1914     {
1915 #ifdef FEAT_VREPLACE
1916 	if (State & VREPLACE_FLAG)
1917 	{
1918 	    colnr_T	new_vcol = 0;   /* init for GCC */
1919 	    colnr_T	vcol;
1920 	    int		old_list;
1921 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1922 	    char_u	buf[2];
1923 #endif
1924 
1925 	    /*
1926 	     * Disable 'list' temporarily, unless 'cpo' contains the 'L' flag.
1927 	     * Returns the old value of list, so when finished,
1928 	     * curwin->w_p_list should be set back to this.
1929 	     */
1930 	    old_list = curwin->w_p_list;
1931 	    if (old_list && vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISTWM) == NULL)
1932 		curwin->w_p_list = FALSE;
1933 
1934 	    /*
1935 	     * In virtual replace mode each character may replace one or more
1936 	     * characters (zero if it's a TAB).  Count the number of bytes to
1937 	     * be deleted to make room for the new character, counting screen
1938 	     * cells.  May result in adding spaces to fill a gap.
1939 	     */
1940 	    getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, NULL, &vcol, NULL);
1941 #ifndef FEAT_MBYTE
1942 	    buf[0] = c;
1943 	    buf[1] = NUL;
1944 #endif
1945 	    new_vcol = vcol + chartabsize(buf, vcol);
1946 	    while (oldp[col + oldlen] != NUL && vcol < new_vcol)
1947 	    {
1948 		vcol += chartabsize(oldp + col + oldlen, vcol);
1949 		/* Don't need to remove a TAB that takes us to the right
1950 		 * position. */
1951 		if (vcol > new_vcol && oldp[col + oldlen] == TAB)
1952 		    break;
1953 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1954 		oldlen += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + oldlen);
1955 #else
1956 		++oldlen;
1957 #endif
1958 		/* Deleted a bit too much, insert spaces. */
1959 		if (vcol > new_vcol)
1960 		    newlen += vcol - new_vcol;
1961 	    }
1962 	    curwin->w_p_list = old_list;
1963 	}
1964 	else
1965 #endif
1966 	    if (oldp[col] != NUL)
1967 	{
1968 	    /* normal replace */
1969 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1970 	    oldlen = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col);
1971 #else
1972 	    oldlen = 1;
1973 #endif
1974 	}
1975 
1976 
1977 	/* Push the replaced bytes onto the replace stack, so that they can be
1978 	 * put back when BS is used.  The bytes of a multi-byte character are
1979 	 * done the other way around, so that the first byte is popped off
1980 	 * first (it tells the byte length of the character). */
1981 	replace_push(NUL);
1982 	for (i = 0; i < oldlen; ++i)
1983 	{
1984 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
1985 	    l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col + i) - 1;
1986 	    for (j = l; j >= 0; --j)
1987 		replace_push(oldp[col + i + j]);
1988 	    i += l;
1989 #else
1990 	    replace_push(oldp[col + i]);
1991 #endif
1992 	}
1993     }
1994 
1995     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(linelen + newlen - oldlen));
1996     if (newp == NULL)
1997 	return;
1998 
1999     /* Copy bytes before the cursor. */
2000     if (col > 0)
2001 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2002 
2003     /* Copy bytes after the changed character(s). */
2004     p = newp + col;
2005     mch_memmove(p + newlen, oldp + col + oldlen,
2006 					    (size_t)(linelen - col - oldlen));
2007 
2008     /* Insert or overwrite the new character. */
2009 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2010     mch_memmove(p, buf, charlen);
2011     i = charlen;
2012 #else
2013     *p = c;
2014     i = 1;
2015 #endif
2016 
2017     /* Fill with spaces when necessary. */
2018     while (i < newlen)
2019 	p[i++] = ' ';
2020 
2021     /* Replace the line in the buffer. */
2022     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2023 
2024     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2025     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2026 
2027     /*
2028      * If we're in Insert or Replace mode and 'showmatch' is set, then briefly
2029      * show the match for right parens and braces.
2030      */
2031     if (p_sm && (State & INSERT)
2032 	    && msg_silent == 0
2033 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2034 	    && charlen == 1
2035 #endif
2036        )
2037 	showmatch(c);
2038 
2039 #ifdef FEAT_RIGHTLEFT
2040     if (!p_ri || (State & REPLACE_FLAG))
2041 #endif
2042     {
2043 	/* Normal insert: move cursor right */
2044 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2045 	curwin->w_cursor.col += charlen;
2046 #else
2047 	++curwin->w_cursor.col;
2048 #endif
2049     }
2050     /*
2051      * TODO: should try to update w_row here, to avoid recomputing it later.
2052      */
2053 }
2054 
2055 /*
2056  * Insert a string at the cursor position.
2057  * Note: Does NOT handle Replace mode.
2058  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2059  */
2060     void
2061 ins_str(s)
2062     char_u	*s;
2063 {
2064     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2065     int		newlen = (int)STRLEN(s);
2066     int		oldlen;
2067     colnr_T	col;
2068     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2069 
2070 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2071     if (virtual_active() && curwin->w_cursor.coladd > 0)
2072 	coladvance_force(getviscol());
2073 #endif
2074 
2075     col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2076     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2077     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2078 
2079     newp = alloc_check((unsigned)(oldlen + newlen + 1));
2080     if (newp == NULL)
2081 	return;
2082     if (col > 0)
2083 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2084     mch_memmove(newp + col, s, (size_t)newlen);
2085     mch_memmove(newp + col + newlen, oldp + col, (size_t)(oldlen - col + 1));
2086     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2087     changed_bytes(lnum, col);
2088     curwin->w_cursor.col += newlen;
2089 }
2090 
2091 /*
2092  * Delete one character under the cursor.
2093  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2094  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2095  *
2096  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2097  */
2098     int
2099 del_char(fixpos)
2100     int		fixpos;
2101 {
2102 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2103     if (has_mbyte)
2104     {
2105 	/* Make sure the cursor is at the start of a character. */
2106 	mb_adjust_cursor();
2107 	if (*ml_get_cursor() == NUL)
2108 	    return FAIL;
2109 	return del_chars(1L, fixpos);
2110     }
2111 #endif
2112     return del_bytes(1L, fixpos);
2113 }
2114 
2115 #if defined(FEAT_MBYTE) || defined(PROTO)
2116 /*
2117  * Like del_bytes(), but delete characters instead of bytes.
2118  */
2119     int
2120 del_chars(count, fixpos)
2121     long	count;
2122     int		fixpos;
2123 {
2124     long	bytes = 0;
2125     long	i;
2126     char_u	*p;
2127     int		l;
2128 
2129     p = ml_get_cursor();
2130     for (i = 0; i < count && *p != NUL; ++i)
2131     {
2132 	l = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p);
2133 	bytes += l;
2134 	p += l;
2135     }
2136     return del_bytes(bytes, fixpos);
2137 }
2138 #endif
2139 
2140 /*
2141  * Delete "count" bytes under the cursor.
2142  * If "fixpos" is TRUE, don't leave the cursor on the NUL after the line.
2143  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2144  *
2145  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2146  */
2147     int
2148 del_bytes(count, fixpos)
2149     long	count;
2150     int		fixpos;
2151 {
2152     char_u	*oldp, *newp;
2153     colnr_T	oldlen;
2154     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2155     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2156     int		was_alloced;
2157     long	movelen;
2158 
2159     oldp = ml_get(lnum);
2160     oldlen = (int)STRLEN(oldp);
2161 
2162     /*
2163      * Can't do anything when the cursor is on the NUL after the line.
2164      */
2165     if (col >= oldlen)
2166 	return FAIL;
2167 
2168 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2169     /* If 'delcombine' is set and deleting (less than) one character, only
2170      * delete the last combining character. */
2171     if (p_deco && enc_utf8 && (*mb_ptr2len_check)(oldp + col) <= count)
2172     {
2173 	int	c1, c2;
2174 	int	n;
2175 
2176 	(void)utfc_ptr2char(oldp + col, &c1, &c2);
2177 	if (c1 != NUL)
2178 	{
2179 	    /* Find the last composing char, there can be several. */
2180 	    n = col;
2181 	    do
2182 	    {
2183 		col = n;
2184 		count = utf_ptr2len_check(oldp + n);
2185 		n += count;
2186 	    } while (UTF_COMPOSINGLIKE(oldp + col, oldp + n));
2187 	    fixpos = 0;
2188 	}
2189     }
2190 #endif
2191 
2192     /*
2193      * When count is too big, reduce it.
2194      */
2195     movelen = (long)oldlen - (long)col - count + 1; /* includes trailing NUL */
2196     if (movelen <= 1)
2197     {
2198 	/*
2199 	 * If we just took off the last character of a non-blank line, and
2200 	 * fixpos is TRUE, we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2201 	 */
2202 	if (col > 0 && fixpos)
2203 	{
2204 	    --curwin->w_cursor.col;
2205 #ifdef FEAT_VIRTUALEDIT
2206 	    curwin->w_cursor.coladd = 0;
2207 #endif
2208 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2209 	    if (has_mbyte)
2210 		curwin->w_cursor.col -=
2211 			    (*mb_head_off)(oldp, oldp + curwin->w_cursor.col);
2212 #endif
2213 	}
2214 	count = oldlen - col;
2215 	movelen = 1;
2216     }
2217 
2218     /*
2219      * If the old line has been allocated the deletion can be done in the
2220      * existing line. Otherwise a new line has to be allocated
2221      */
2222     was_alloced = ml_line_alloced();	    /* check if oldp was allocated */
2223 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2224     if (was_alloced && usingNetbeans)
2225 	netbeans_removed(curbuf, lnum, col, count);
2226     /* else is handled by ml_replace() */
2227 #endif
2228     if (was_alloced)
2229 	newp = oldp;			    /* use same allocated memory */
2230     else
2231     {					    /* need to allocate a new line */
2232 	newp = alloc((unsigned)(oldlen + 1 - count));
2233 	if (newp == NULL)
2234 	    return FAIL;
2235 	mch_memmove(newp, oldp, (size_t)col);
2236     }
2237     mch_memmove(newp + col, oldp + col + count, (size_t)movelen);
2238     if (!was_alloced)
2239 	ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2240 
2241     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2242     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2243 
2244     return OK;
2245 }
2246 
2247 /*
2248  * Delete from cursor to end of line.
2249  * Caller must have prepared for undo.
2250  *
2251  * return FAIL for failure, OK otherwise
2252  */
2253     int
2254 truncate_line(fixpos)
2255     int		fixpos;	    /* if TRUE fix the cursor position when done */
2256 {
2257     char_u	*newp;
2258     linenr_T	lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
2259     colnr_T	col = curwin->w_cursor.col;
2260 
2261     if (col == 0)
2262 	newp = vim_strsave((char_u *)"");
2263     else
2264 	newp = vim_strnsave(ml_get(lnum), col);
2265 
2266     if (newp == NULL)
2267 	return FAIL;
2268 
2269     ml_replace(lnum, newp, FALSE);
2270 
2271     /* mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2272     changed_bytes(lnum, curwin->w_cursor.col);
2273 
2274     /*
2275      * If "fixpos" is TRUE we don't want to end up positioned at the NUL.
2276      */
2277     if (fixpos && curwin->w_cursor.col > 0)
2278 	--curwin->w_cursor.col;
2279 
2280     return OK;
2281 }
2282 
2283 /*
2284  * Delete "nlines" lines at the cursor.
2285  * Saves the lines for undo first if "undo" is TRUE.
2286  */
2287     void
2288 del_lines(nlines, undo)
2289     long	nlines;		/* number of lines to delete */
2290     int		undo;		/* if TRUE, prepare for undo */
2291 {
2292     long	n;
2293 
2294     if (nlines <= 0)
2295 	return;
2296 
2297     /* save the deleted lines for undo */
2298     if (undo && u_savedel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, nlines) == FAIL)
2299 	return;
2300 
2301     for (n = 0; n < nlines; )
2302     {
2303 	if (curbuf->b_ml.ml_flags & ML_EMPTY)	    /* nothing to delete */
2304 	    break;
2305 
2306 	ml_delete(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE);
2307 	++n;
2308 
2309 	/* If we delete the last line in the file, stop */
2310 	if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
2311 	    break;
2312     }
2313     /* adjust marks, mark the buffer as changed and prepare for displaying */
2314     deleted_lines_mark(curwin->w_cursor.lnum, n);
2315 
2316     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
2317     check_cursor_lnum();
2318 }
2319 
2320     int
2321 gchar_pos(pos)
2322     pos_T *pos;
2323 {
2324     char_u	*ptr = ml_get_pos(pos);
2325 
2326 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2327     if (has_mbyte)
2328 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ptr);
2329 #endif
2330     return (int)*ptr;
2331 }
2332 
2333     int
2334 gchar_cursor()
2335 {
2336 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
2337     if (has_mbyte)
2338 	return (*mb_ptr2char)(ml_get_cursor());
2339 #endif
2340     return (int)*ml_get_cursor();
2341 }
2342 
2343 /*
2344  * Write a character at the current cursor position.
2345  * It is directly written into the block.
2346  */
2347     void
2348 pchar_cursor(c)
2349     int c;
2350 {
2351     *(ml_get_buf(curbuf, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, TRUE)
2352 						  + curwin->w_cursor.col) = c;
2353 }
2354 
2355 #if 0 /* not used */
2356 /*
2357  * Put *pos at end of current buffer
2358  */
2359     void
2360 goto_endofbuf(pos)
2361     pos_T    *pos;
2362 {
2363     char_u  *p;
2364 
2365     pos->lnum = curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count;
2366     pos->col = 0;
2367     p = ml_get(pos->lnum);
2368     while (*p++)
2369 	++pos->col;
2370 }
2371 #endif
2372 
2373 /*
2374  * When extra == 0: Return TRUE if the cursor is before or on the first
2375  *		    non-blank in the line.
2376  * When extra == 1: Return TRUE if the cursor is before the first non-blank in
2377  *		    the line.
2378  */
2379     int
2380 inindent(extra)
2381     int	    extra;
2382 {
2383     char_u	*ptr;
2384     colnr_T	col;
2385 
2386     for (col = 0, ptr = ml_get_curline(); vim_iswhite(*ptr); ++col)
2387 	++ptr;
2388     if (col >= curwin->w_cursor.col + extra)
2389 	return TRUE;
2390     else
2391 	return FALSE;
2392 }
2393 
2394 /*
2395  * Skip to next part of an option argument: Skip space and comma.
2396  */
2397     char_u *
2398 skip_to_option_part(p)
2399     char_u  *p;
2400 {
2401     if (*p == ',')
2402 	++p;
2403     while (*p == ' ')
2404 	++p;
2405     return p;
2406 }
2407 
2408 /*
2409  * changed() is called when something in the current buffer is changed.
2410  *
2411  * Most often called through changed_bytes() and changed_lines(), which also
2412  * mark the area of the display to be redrawn.
2413  */
2414     void
2415 changed()
2416 {
2417 #if defined(FEAT_XIM) && defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK)
2418     /* The text of the preediting area is inserted, but this doesn't
2419      * mean a change of the buffer yet.  That is delayed until the
2420      * text is committed. (this means preedit becomes empty) */
2421     if (im_is_preediting() && !xim_changed_while_preediting)
2422 	return;
2423     xim_changed_while_preediting = FALSE;
2424 #endif
2425 
2426     if (!curbuf->b_changed)
2427     {
2428 	int	save_msg_scroll = msg_scroll;
2429 
2430 	change_warning(0);
2431 	/* Create a swap file if that is wanted.
2432 	 * Don't do this for "nofile" and "nowrite" buffer types. */
2433 	if (curbuf->b_may_swap
2434 #ifdef FEAT_QUICKFIX
2435 		&& !bt_dontwrite(curbuf)
2436 #endif
2437 		)
2438 	{
2439 	    ml_open_file(curbuf);
2440 
2441 	    /* The ml_open_file() can cause an ATTENTION message.
2442 	     * Wait two seconds, to make sure the user reads this unexpected
2443 	     * message.  Since we could be anywhere, call wait_return() now,
2444 	     * and don't let the emsg() set msg_scroll. */
2445 	    if (need_wait_return && emsg_silent == 0)
2446 	    {
2447 		out_flush();
2448 		ui_delay(2000L, TRUE);
2449 		wait_return(TRUE);
2450 		msg_scroll = save_msg_scroll;
2451 	    }
2452 	}
2453 	curbuf->b_changed = TRUE;
2454 	ml_setdirty(curbuf, TRUE);
2455 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2456 	check_status(curbuf);
2457 #endif
2458 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2459 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2460 #endif
2461     }
2462     ++curbuf->b_changedtick;
2463     ++global_changedtick;
2464 }
2465 
2466 static void changedOneline __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
2467 static void changed_common __ARGS((linenr_T lnum, colnr_T col, linenr_T lnume, long xtra));
2468 
2469 /*
2470  * Changed bytes within a single line for the current buffer.
2471  * - marks the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2472  * - marks the buffer changed by calling changed()
2473  * - invalidates cached values
2474  */
2475     void
2476 changed_bytes(lnum, col)
2477     linenr_T	lnum;
2478     colnr_T	col;
2479 {
2480     changedOneline(lnum);
2481     changed_common(lnum, col, lnum + 1, 0L);
2482 }
2483 
2484     static void
2485 changedOneline(lnum)
2486     linenr_T	lnum;
2487 {
2488     if (curbuf->b_mod_set)
2489     {
2490 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2491 	if (lnum < curbuf->b_mod_top)
2492 	    curbuf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2493 	else if (lnum >= curbuf->b_mod_bot)
2494 	    curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2495     }
2496     else
2497     {
2498 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed to one line */
2499 	curbuf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2500 	curbuf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2501 	curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnum + 1;
2502 	curbuf->b_mod_xlines = 0;
2503     }
2504 }
2505 
2506 /*
2507  * Appended "count" lines below line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2508  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2509  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2510  */
2511     void
2512 appended_lines(lnum, count)
2513     linenr_T	lnum;
2514     long	count;
2515 {
2516     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2517 }
2518 
2519 /*
2520  * Like appended_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2521  */
2522     void
2523 appended_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2524     linenr_T	lnum;
2525     long	count;
2526 {
2527     mark_adjust(lnum + 1, (linenr_T)MAXLNUM, count, 0L);
2528     changed_lines(lnum + 1, 0, lnum + 1, count);
2529 }
2530 
2531 /*
2532  * Deleted "count" lines at line "lnum" in the current buffer.
2533  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2534  * Takes care of marking the buffer to be redrawn and sets the changed flag.
2535  */
2536     void
2537 deleted_lines(lnum, count)
2538     linenr_T	lnum;
2539     long	count;
2540 {
2541     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2542 }
2543 
2544 /*
2545  * Like deleted_lines(), but adjust marks first.
2546  */
2547     void
2548 deleted_lines_mark(lnum, count)
2549     linenr_T	lnum;
2550     long	count;
2551 {
2552     mark_adjust(lnum, (linenr_T)(lnum + count - 1), (long)MAXLNUM, -count);
2553     changed_lines(lnum, 0, lnum + count, -count);
2554 }
2555 
2556 /*
2557  * Changed lines for the current buffer.
2558  * Must be called AFTER the change and after mark_adjust().
2559  * - mark the buffer changed by calling changed()
2560  * - mark the windows on this buffer to be redisplayed
2561  * - invalidate cached values
2562  * "lnum" is the first line that needs displaying, "lnume" the first line
2563  * below the changed lines (BEFORE the change).
2564  * When only inserting lines, "lnum" and "lnume" are equal.
2565  * Takes care of calling changed() and updating b_mod_*.
2566  */
2567     void
2568 changed_lines(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2569     linenr_T	lnum;	    /* first line with change */
2570     colnr_T	col;	    /* column in first line with change */
2571     linenr_T	lnume;	    /* line below last changed line */
2572     long	xtra;	    /* number of extra lines (negative when deleting) */
2573 {
2574     if (curbuf->b_mod_set)
2575     {
2576 	/* find the maximum area that must be redisplayed */
2577 	if (lnum < curbuf->b_mod_top)
2578 	    curbuf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2579 	if (lnum < curbuf->b_mod_bot)
2580 	{
2581 	    /* adjust old bot position for xtra lines */
2582 	    curbuf->b_mod_bot += xtra;
2583 	    if (curbuf->b_mod_bot < lnum)
2584 		curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnum;
2585 	}
2586 	if (lnume + xtra > curbuf->b_mod_bot)
2587 	    curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2588 	curbuf->b_mod_xlines += xtra;
2589     }
2590     else
2591     {
2592 	/* set the area that must be redisplayed */
2593 	curbuf->b_mod_set = TRUE;
2594 	curbuf->b_mod_top = lnum;
2595 	curbuf->b_mod_bot = lnume + xtra;
2596 	curbuf->b_mod_xlines = xtra;
2597     }
2598 
2599     changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra);
2600 }
2601 
2602     static void
2603 changed_common(lnum, col, lnume, xtra)
2604     linenr_T	lnum;
2605     colnr_T	col;
2606     linenr_T	lnume;
2607     long	xtra;
2608 {
2609     win_T	*wp;
2610     int		i;
2611 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2612     int		cols;
2613     pos_T	*p;
2614     int		add;
2615 #endif
2616 
2617     /* mark the buffer as modified */
2618     changed();
2619 
2620     /* set the '. mark */
2621     if (!cmdmod.keepjumps)
2622     {
2623 	curbuf->b_last_change.lnum = lnum;
2624 	curbuf->b_last_change.col = col;
2625 
2626 #ifdef FEAT_JUMPLIST
2627 	/* Create a new entry if a new undo-able change was started or we
2628 	 * don't have an entry yet. */
2629 	if (curbuf->b_new_change || curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2630 	{
2631 	    if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == 0)
2632 		add = TRUE;
2633 	    else
2634 	    {
2635 		/* Don't create a new entry when the line number is the same
2636 		 * as the last one and the column is not too far away.  Avoids
2637 		 * creating many entries for typing "xxxxx". */
2638 		p = &curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1];
2639 		if (p->lnum != lnum)
2640 		    add = TRUE;
2641 		else
2642 		{
2643 		    cols = comp_textwidth(FALSE);
2644 		    if (cols == 0)
2645 			cols = 79;
2646 		    add = (p->col + cols < col || col + cols < p->col);
2647 		}
2648 	    }
2649 	    if (add)
2650 	    {
2651 		/* This is the first of a new sequence of undo-able changes
2652 		 * and it's at some distance of the last change.  Use a new
2653 		 * position in the changelist. */
2654 		curbuf->b_new_change = FALSE;
2655 
2656 		if (curbuf->b_changelistlen == JUMPLISTSIZE)
2657 		{
2658 		    /* changelist is full: remove oldest entry */
2659 		    curbuf->b_changelistlen = JUMPLISTSIZE - 1;
2660 		    mch_memmove(curbuf->b_changelist, curbuf->b_changelist + 1,
2661 					  sizeof(pos_T) * (JUMPLISTSIZE - 1));
2662 		    FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2663 		    {
2664 			/* Correct position in changelist for other windows on
2665 			 * this buffer. */
2666 			if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf && wp->w_changelistidx > 0)
2667 			    --wp->w_changelistidx;
2668 		    }
2669 		}
2670 		FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2671 		{
2672 		    /* For other windows, if the position in the changelist is
2673 		     * at the end it stays at the end. */
2674 		    if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf
2675 			    && wp->w_changelistidx == curbuf->b_changelistlen)
2676 			++wp->w_changelistidx;
2677 		}
2678 		++curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2679 	    }
2680 	}
2681 	curbuf->b_changelist[curbuf->b_changelistlen - 1] =
2682 							curbuf->b_last_change;
2683 	/* The current window is always after the last change, so that "g,"
2684 	 * takes you back to it. */
2685 	curwin->w_changelistidx = curbuf->b_changelistlen;
2686 #endif
2687     }
2688 
2689     FOR_ALL_WINDOWS(wp)
2690     {
2691 	if (wp->w_buffer == curbuf)
2692 	{
2693 	    /* Mark this window to be redrawn later. */
2694 	    if (wp->w_redr_type < VALID)
2695 		wp->w_redr_type = VALID;
2696 
2697 	    /* Check if a change in the buffer has invalidated the cached
2698 	     * values for the cursor. */
2699 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2700 	    /*
2701 	     * Update the folds for this window.  Can't postpone this, because
2702 	     * a following operator might work on the whole fold: ">>dd".
2703 	     */
2704 	    foldUpdate(wp, lnum, lnume + xtra - 1);
2705 
2706 	    /* The change may cause lines above or below the change to become
2707 	     * included in a fold.  Set lnum/lnume to the first/last line that
2708 	     * might be displayed differently.
2709 	     * Set w_cline_folded here as an efficient way to update it when
2710 	     * inserting lines just above a closed fold. */
2711 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnum, &lnum, NULL, FALSE, NULL);
2712 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum)
2713 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2714 	    i = hasFoldingWin(wp, lnume, NULL, &lnume, FALSE, NULL);
2715 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnume)
2716 		wp->w_cline_folded = i;
2717 
2718 	    /* If the changed line is in a range of previously folded lines,
2719 	     * compare with the first line in that range. */
2720 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum <= lnum)
2721 	    {
2722 		i = find_wl_entry(wp, lnum);
2723 		if (i >= 0 && wp->w_cursor.lnum > wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum)
2724 		    changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2725 	    }
2726 #endif
2727 
2728 	    if (wp->w_cursor.lnum > lnum)
2729 		changed_line_abv_curs_win(wp);
2730 	    else if (wp->w_cursor.lnum == lnum && wp->w_cursor.col >= col)
2731 		changed_cline_bef_curs_win(wp);
2732 	    if (wp->w_botline >= lnum)
2733 	    {
2734 		/* Assume that botline doesn't change (inserted lines make
2735 		 * other lines scroll down below botline). */
2736 		approximate_botline_win(wp);
2737 	    }
2738 
2739 	    /* Check if any w_lines[] entries have become invalid.
2740 	     * For entries below the change: Correct the lnums for
2741 	     * inserted/deleted lines.  Makes it possible to stop displaying
2742 	     * after the change. */
2743 	    for (i = 0; i < wp->w_lines_valid; ++i)
2744 		if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid)
2745 		{
2746 		    if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum >= lnum)
2747 		    {
2748 			if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum < lnume)
2749 			{
2750 			    /* line included in change */
2751 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2752 			}
2753 			else if (xtra != 0)
2754 			{
2755 			    /* line below change */
2756 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lnum += xtra;
2757 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2758 			    wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum += xtra;
2759 #endif
2760 			}
2761 		    }
2762 #ifdef FEAT_FOLDING
2763 		    else if (wp->w_lines[i].wl_lastlnum >= lnum)
2764 		    {
2765 			/* change somewhere inside this range of folded lines,
2766 			 * may need to be redrawn */
2767 			wp->w_lines[i].wl_valid = FALSE;
2768 		    }
2769 #endif
2770 		}
2771 	}
2772     }
2773 
2774     /* Call update_screen() later, which checks out what needs to be redrawn,
2775      * since it notices b_mod_set and then uses b_mod_*. */
2776     if (must_redraw < VALID)
2777 	must_redraw = VALID;
2778 }
2779 
2780 /*
2781  * unchanged() is called when the changed flag must be reset for buffer 'buf'
2782  */
2783     void
2784 unchanged(buf, ff)
2785     buf_T	*buf;
2786     int		ff;	/* also reset 'fileformat' */
2787 {
2788     if (buf->b_changed || (ff && file_ff_differs(buf)))
2789     {
2790 	buf->b_changed = 0;
2791 	ml_setdirty(buf, FALSE);
2792 	if (ff)
2793 	    save_file_ff(buf);
2794 #ifdef FEAT_WINDOWS
2795 	check_status(buf);
2796 #endif
2797 #ifdef FEAT_TITLE
2798 	need_maketitle = TRUE;	    /* set window title later */
2799 #endif
2800     }
2801     ++buf->b_changedtick;
2802     ++global_changedtick;
2803 #ifdef FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG
2804     netbeans_unmodified(buf);
2805 #endif
2806 }
2807 
2808 #if defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(PROTO)
2809 /*
2810  * check_status: called when the status bars for the buffer 'buf'
2811  *		 need to be updated
2812  */
2813     void
2814 check_status(buf)
2815     buf_T	*buf;
2816 {
2817     win_T	*wp;
2818 
2819     for (wp = firstwin; wp != NULL; wp = wp->w_next)
2820 	if (wp->w_buffer == buf && wp->w_status_height)
2821 	{
2822 	    wp->w_redr_status = TRUE;
2823 	    if (must_redraw < VALID)
2824 		must_redraw = VALID;
2825 	}
2826 }
2827 #endif
2828 
2829 /*
2830  * If the file is readonly, give a warning message with the first change.
2831  * Don't do this for autocommands.
2832  * Don't use emsg(), because it flushes the macro buffer.
2833  * If we have undone all changes b_changed will be FALSE, but b_did_warn
2834  * will be TRUE.
2835  */
2836     void
2837 change_warning(col)
2838     int	    col;		/* column for message; non-zero when in insert
2839 				   mode and 'showmode' is on */
2840 {
2841     if (curbuf->b_did_warn == FALSE
2842 	    && curbufIsChanged() == 0
2843 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2844 	    && !autocmd_busy
2845 #endif
2846 	    && curbuf->b_p_ro)
2847     {
2848 #ifdef FEAT_AUTOCMD
2849 	apply_autocmds(EVENT_FILECHANGEDRO, NULL, NULL, FALSE, curbuf);
2850 	if (!curbuf->b_p_ro)
2851 	    return;
2852 #endif
2853 	/*
2854 	 * Do what msg() does, but with a column offset if the warning should
2855 	 * be after the mode message.
2856 	 */
2857 	msg_start();
2858 	if (msg_row == Rows - 1)
2859 	    msg_col = col;
2860 	msg_source(hl_attr(HLF_W));
2861 	MSG_PUTS_ATTR(_("W10: Warning: Changing a readonly file"),
2862 						   hl_attr(HLF_W) | MSG_HIST);
2863 	msg_clr_eos();
2864 	(void)msg_end();
2865 	if (msg_silent == 0 && !silent_mode)
2866 	{
2867 	    out_flush();
2868 	    ui_delay(1000L, TRUE); /* give the user time to think about it */
2869 	}
2870 	curbuf->b_did_warn = TRUE;
2871 	redraw_cmdline = FALSE;	/* don't redraw and erase the message */
2872 	if (msg_row < Rows - 1)
2873 	    showmode();
2874     }
2875 }
2876 
2877 /*
2878  * Ask for a reply from the user, a 'y' or a 'n'.
2879  * No other characters are accepted, the message is repeated until a valid
2880  * reply is entered or CTRL-C is hit.
2881  * If direct is TRUE, don't use vgetc() but ui_inchar(), don't get characters
2882  * from any buffers but directly from the user.
2883  *
2884  * return the 'y' or 'n'
2885  */
2886     int
2887 ask_yesno(str, direct)
2888     char_u  *str;
2889     int	    direct;
2890 {
2891     int	    r = ' ';
2892     int	    save_State = State;
2893 
2894     if (exiting)		/* put terminal in raw mode for this question */
2895 	settmode(TMODE_RAW);
2896     ++no_wait_return;
2897 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
2898     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
2899 #endif
2900     State = CONFIRM;		/* mouse behaves like with :confirm */
2901 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2902     setmouse();			/* disables mouse for xterm */
2903 #endif
2904     ++no_mapping;
2905     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
2906 
2907     while (r != 'y' && r != 'n')
2908     {
2909 	/* same highlighting as for wait_return */
2910 	smsg_attr(hl_attr(HLF_R), (char_u *)"%s (y/n)?", str);
2911 	if (direct)
2912 	    r = get_keystroke();
2913 	else
2914 	    r = safe_vgetc();
2915 	if (r == Ctrl_C || r == ESC)
2916 	    r = 'n';
2917 	msg_putchar(r);	    /* show what you typed */
2918 	out_flush();
2919     }
2920     --no_wait_return;
2921     State = save_State;
2922 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2923     setmouse();
2924 #endif
2925     --no_mapping;
2926     --allow_keys;
2927 
2928     return r;
2929 }
2930 
2931 /*
2932  * Get a key stroke directly from the user.
2933  * Ignores mouse clicks and scrollbar events, except a click for the left
2934  * button (used at the more prompt).
2935  * Doesn't use vgetc(), because it syncs undo and eats mapped characters.
2936  * Disadvantage: typeahead is ignored.
2937  * Translates the interrupt character for unix to ESC.
2938  */
2939     int
2940 get_keystroke()
2941 {
2942 #define CBUFLEN 151
2943     char_u	buf[CBUFLEN];
2944     int		len = 0;
2945     int		n;
2946     int		save_mapped_ctrl_c = mapped_ctrl_c;
2947 
2948     mapped_ctrl_c = FALSE;	/* mappings are not used here */
2949     for (;;)
2950     {
2951 	cursor_on();
2952 	out_flush();
2953 
2954 	/* First time: blocking wait.  Second time: wait up to 100ms for a
2955 	 * terminal code to complete.  Leave some room for check_termcode() to
2956 	 * insert a key code into (max 5 chars plus NUL).  And
2957 	 * fix_input_buffer() can triple the number of bytes. */
2958 	n = ui_inchar(buf + len, (CBUFLEN - 6 - len) / 3,
2959 						    len == 0 ? -1L : 100L, 0);
2960 	if (n > 0)
2961 	{
2962 	    /* Replace zero and CSI by a special key code. */
2963 	    n = fix_input_buffer(buf + len, n, FALSE);
2964 	    len += n;
2965 	}
2966 
2967 	/* incomplete termcode: get more characters */
2968 	if ((n = check_termcode(1, buf, len)) < 0)
2969 	    continue;
2970 	/* found a termcode: adjust length */
2971 	if (n > 0)
2972 	    len = n;
2973 	if (len == 0)	    /* nothing typed yet */
2974 	    continue;
2975 
2976 	/* Handle modifier and/or special key code. */
2977 	n = buf[0];
2978 	if (n == K_SPECIAL)
2979 	{
2980 	    n = TO_SPECIAL(buf[1], buf[2]);
2981 	    if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER
2982 		    || n == K_IGNORE
2983 #ifdef FEAT_MOUSE
2984 		    || n == K_LEFTMOUSE_NM
2985 		    || n == K_LEFTDRAG
2986 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE
2987 		    || n == K_LEFTRELEASE_NM
2988 		    || n == K_MIDDLEMOUSE
2989 		    || n == K_MIDDLEDRAG
2990 		    || n == K_MIDDLERELEASE
2991 		    || n == K_RIGHTMOUSE
2992 		    || n == K_RIGHTDRAG
2993 		    || n == K_RIGHTRELEASE
2994 		    || n == K_MOUSEDOWN
2995 		    || n == K_MOUSEUP
2996 		    || n == K_X1MOUSE
2997 		    || n == K_X1DRAG
2998 		    || n == K_X1RELEASE
2999 		    || n == K_X2MOUSE
3000 		    || n == K_X2DRAG
3001 		    || n == K_X2RELEASE
3002 # ifdef FEAT_GUI
3003 		    || n == K_VER_SCROLLBAR
3004 		    || n == K_HOR_SCROLLBAR
3005 # endif
3006 #endif
3007 	       )
3008 	    {
3009 		if (buf[1] == KS_MODIFIER)
3010 		    mod_mask = buf[2];
3011 		len -= 3;
3012 		if (len > 0)
3013 		    mch_memmove(buf, buf + 3, (size_t)len);
3014 		continue;
3015 	    }
3016 	}
3017 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
3018 	if (has_mbyte)
3019 	{
3020 	    if (MB_BYTE2LEN(n) > len)
3021 		continue;	/* more bytes to get */
3022 	    buf[len >= CBUFLEN ? CBUFLEN - 1 : len] = NUL;
3023 	    n = (*mb_ptr2char)(buf);
3024 	}
3025 #endif
3026 #ifdef UNIX
3027 	if (n == intr_char)
3028 	    n = ESC;
3029 #endif
3030 	break;
3031     }
3032 
3033     mapped_ctrl_c = save_mapped_ctrl_c;
3034     return n;
3035 }
3036 
3037 /*
3038  * get a number from the user
3039  */
3040     int
3041 get_number(colon)
3042     int	colon;			/* allow colon to abort */
3043 {
3044     int	n = 0;
3045     int	c;
3046 
3047     /* When not printing messages, the user won't know what to type, return a
3048      * zero (as if CR was hit). */
3049     if (msg_silent != 0)
3050 	return 0;
3051 
3052 #ifdef USE_ON_FLY_SCROLL
3053     dont_scroll = TRUE;		/* disallow scrolling here */
3054 #endif
3055     ++no_mapping;
3056     ++allow_keys;		/* no mapping here, but recognize keys */
3057     for (;;)
3058     {
3059 	windgoto(msg_row, msg_col);
3060 	c = safe_vgetc();
3061 	if (VIM_ISDIGIT(c))
3062 	{
3063 	    n = n * 10 + c - '0';
3064 	    msg_putchar(c);
3065 	}
3066 	else if (c == K_DEL || c == K_KDEL || c == K_BS || c == Ctrl_H)
3067 	{
3068 	    n /= 10;
3069 	    MSG_PUTS("\b \b");
3070 	}
3071 	else if (n == 0 && c == ':' && colon)
3072 	{
3073 	    stuffcharReadbuff(':');
3074 	    if (!exmode_active)
3075 		cmdline_row = msg_row;
3076 	    skip_redraw = TRUE;	    /* skip redraw once */
3077 	    do_redraw = FALSE;
3078 	    break;
3079 	}
3080 	else if (c == CAR || c == NL || c == Ctrl_C || c == ESC)
3081 	    break;
3082     }
3083     --no_mapping;
3084     --allow_keys;
3085     return n;
3086 }
3087 
3088     void
3089 msgmore(n)
3090     long n;
3091 {
3092     long pn;
3093 
3094     if (global_busy	    /* no messages now, wait until global is finished */
3095 	    || keep_msg != NULL /* there is a message already, skip this one */
3096 	    || !messaging())  /* 'lazyredraw' set, don't do messages now */
3097 	return;
3098 
3099     if (n > 0)
3100 	pn = n;
3101     else
3102 	pn = -n;
3103 
3104     if (pn > p_report)
3105     {
3106 	if (pn == 1)
3107 	{
3108 	    if (n > 0)
3109 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 more line"));
3110 	    else
3111 		STRCPY(msg_buf, _("1 line less"));
3112 	}
3113 	else
3114 	{
3115 	    if (n > 0)
3116 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld more lines"), pn);
3117 	    else
3118 		sprintf((char *)msg_buf, _("%ld fewer lines"), pn);
3119 	}
3120 	if (got_int)
3121 	    STRCAT(msg_buf, _(" (Interrupted)"));
3122 	if (msg(msg_buf))
3123 	{
3124 	    set_keep_msg(msg_buf);
3125 	    keep_msg_attr = 0;
3126 	}
3127     }
3128 }
3129 
3130 /*
3131  * flush map and typeahead buffers and give a warning for an error
3132  */
3133     void
3134 beep_flush()
3135 {
3136     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3137     {
3138 	flush_buffers(FALSE);
3139 	vim_beep();
3140     }
3141 }
3142 
3143 /*
3144  * give a warning for an error
3145  */
3146     void
3147 vim_beep()
3148 {
3149     if (emsg_silent == 0)
3150     {
3151 	if (p_vb
3152 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
3153 		/* While the GUI is starting up the termcap is set for the GUI
3154 		 * but the output still goes to a terminal. */
3155 		&& !(gui.in_use && gui.starting)
3156 #endif
3157 		)
3158 	{
3159 	    out_str(T_VB);
3160 	}
3161 	else
3162 	{
3163 #ifdef MSDOS
3164 	    /*
3165 	     * The number of beeps outputted is reduced to avoid having to wait
3166 	     * for all the beeps to finish. This is only a problem on systems
3167 	     * where the beeps don't overlap.
3168 	     */
3169 	    if (beep_count == 0 || beep_count == 10)
3170 	    {
3171 		out_char(BELL);
3172 		beep_count = 1;
3173 	    }
3174 	    else
3175 		++beep_count;
3176 #else
3177 	    out_char(BELL);
3178 #endif
3179 	}
3180     }
3181 }
3182 
3183 /*
3184  * To get the "real" home directory:
3185  * - get value of $HOME
3186  * For Unix:
3187  *  - go to that directory
3188  *  - do mch_dirname() to get the real name of that directory.
3189  *  This also works with mounts and links.
3190  *  Don't do this for MS-DOS, it will change the "current dir" for a drive.
3191  */
3192 static char_u	*homedir = NULL;
3193 
3194     void
3195 init_homedir()
3196 {
3197     char_u  *var;
3198 
3199 #ifdef VMS
3200     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3201 #else
3202     var = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3203 #endif
3204 
3205     if (var != NULL && *var == NUL)	/* empty is same as not set */
3206 	var = NULL;
3207 
3208 #ifdef WIN3264
3209     /*
3210      * Weird but true: $HOME may contain an indirect reference to another
3211      * variable, esp. "%USERPROFILE%".  Happens when $USERPROFILE isn't set
3212      * when $HOME is being set.
3213      */
3214     if (var != NULL && *var == '%')
3215     {
3216 	char_u	*p;
3217 	char_u	*exp;
3218 
3219 	p = vim_strchr(var + 1, '%');
3220 	if (p != NULL)
3221 	{
3222 	    STRNCPY(NameBuff, var + 1, p - (var + 1));
3223 	    NameBuff[p - (var + 1)] = NUL;
3224 	    exp = mch_getenv(NameBuff);
3225 	    if (exp != NULL && *exp != NUL
3226 					&& STRLEN(exp) + STRLEN(p) < MAXPATHL)
3227 	    {
3228 		sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", exp, p + 1);
3229 		var = NameBuff;
3230 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3231 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3232 	    }
3233 	}
3234     }
3235 
3236     /*
3237      * Typically, $HOME is not defined on Windows, unless the user has
3238      * specifically defined it for Vim's sake.  However, on Windows NT
3239      * platforms, $HOMEDRIVE and $HOMEPATH are automatically defined for
3240      * each user.  Try constructing $HOME from these.
3241      */
3242     if (var == NULL)
3243     {
3244 	char_u *homedrive, *homepath;
3245 
3246 	homedrive = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEDRIVE");
3247 	homepath = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOMEPATH");
3248 	if (homedrive != NULL && homepath != NULL
3249 			   && STRLEN(homedrive) + STRLEN(homepath) < MAXPATHL)
3250 	{
3251 	    sprintf((char *)NameBuff, "%s%s", homedrive, homepath);
3252 	    if (NameBuff[0] != NUL)
3253 	    {
3254 		var = NameBuff;
3255 		/* Also set $HOME, it's needed for _viminfo. */
3256 		vim_setenv((char_u *)"HOME", NameBuff);
3257 	    }
3258 	}
3259     }
3260 #endif
3261 
3262 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3263     /*
3264      * Default home dir is C:/
3265      * Best assumption we can make in such a situation.
3266      */
3267     if (var == NULL)
3268 	var = "C:/";
3269 #endif
3270     if (var != NULL)
3271     {
3272 #ifdef UNIX
3273 	/*
3274 	 * Change to the directory and get the actual path.  This resolves
3275 	 * links.  Don't do it when we can't return.
3276 	 */
3277 	if (mch_dirname(NameBuff, MAXPATHL) == OK
3278 					  && mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) == 0)
3279 	{
3280 	    if (!mch_chdir((char *)var) && mch_dirname(IObuff, IOSIZE) == OK)
3281 		var = IObuff;
3282 	    if (mch_chdir((char *)NameBuff) != 0)
3283 		EMSG(_(e_prev_dir));
3284 	}
3285 #endif
3286 	homedir = vim_strsave(var);
3287     }
3288 }
3289 
3290 /*
3291  * Expand environment variable with path name.
3292  * "~/" is also expanded, using $HOME.	For Unix "~user/" is expanded.
3293  * Skips over "\ ", "\~" and "\$".
3294  * If anything fails no expansion is done and dst equals src.
3295  */
3296     void
3297 expand_env(src, dst, dstlen)
3298     char_u	*src;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3299     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3300     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3301 {
3302     expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, FALSE);
3303 }
3304 
3305     void
3306 expand_env_esc(src, dst, dstlen, esc)
3307     char_u	*src;		/* input string e.g. "$HOME/vim.hlp" */
3308     char_u	*dst;		/* where to put the result */
3309     int		dstlen;		/* maximum length of the result */
3310     int		esc;		/* escape spaces in expanded variables */
3311 {
3312     char_u	*tail;
3313     int		c;
3314     char_u	*var;
3315     int		copy_char;
3316     int		mustfree;	/* var was allocated, need to free it later */
3317     int		at_start = TRUE; /* at start of a name */
3318 
3319     src = skipwhite(src);
3320     --dstlen;		    /* leave one char space for "\," */
3321     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3322     {
3323 	copy_char = TRUE;
3324 	if (*src == '$'
3325 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3326 		|| *src == '%'
3327 #endif
3328 		|| (*src == '~' && at_start))
3329 	{
3330 	    mustfree = FALSE;
3331 
3332 	    /*
3333 	     * The variable name is copied into dst temporarily, because it may
3334 	     * be a string in read-only memory and a NUL needs to be appended.
3335 	     */
3336 	    if (*src != '~')				/* environment var */
3337 	    {
3338 		tail = src + 1;
3339 		var = dst;
3340 		c = dstlen - 1;
3341 
3342 #ifdef UNIX
3343 		/* Unix has ${var-name} type environment vars */
3344 		if (*tail == '{' && !vim_isIDc('{'))
3345 		{
3346 		    tail++;	/* ignore '{' */
3347 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail && *tail != '}')
3348 			*var++ = *tail++;
3349 		}
3350 		else
3351 #endif
3352 		{
3353 		    while (c-- > 0 && *tail != NUL && ((vim_isIDc(*tail))
3354 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
3355 			    || (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3356 #endif
3357 			    ))
3358 		    {
3359 #ifdef OS2		/* env vars only in uppercase */
3360 			*var++ = TOUPPER_LOC(*tail);
3361 			tail++;	    /* toupper() may be a macro! */
3362 #else
3363 			*var++ = *tail++;
3364 #endif
3365 		    }
3366 		}
3367 
3368 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3369 # ifdef UNIX
3370 		if (src[1] == '{' && *tail != '}')
3371 # else
3372 		if (*src == '%' && *tail != '%')
3373 # endif
3374 		    var = NULL;
3375 		else
3376 		{
3377 # ifdef UNIX
3378 		    if (src[1] == '{')
3379 # else
3380 		    if (*src == '%')
3381 #endif
3382 			++tail;
3383 #endif
3384 		    *var = NUL;
3385 		    var = vim_getenv(dst, &mustfree);
3386 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2) || defined(UNIX)
3387 		}
3388 #endif
3389 	    }
3390 							/* home directory */
3391 	    else if (  src[1] == NUL
3392 		    || vim_ispathsep(src[1])
3393 		    || vim_strchr((char_u *)" ,\t\n", src[1]) != NULL)
3394 	    {
3395 		var = homedir;
3396 		tail = src + 1;
3397 	    }
3398 	    else					/* user directory */
3399 	    {
3400 #if defined(UNIX) || (defined(VMS) && defined(USER_HOME))
3401 		/*
3402 		 * Copy ~user to dst[], so we can put a NUL after it.
3403 		 */
3404 		tail = src;
3405 		var = dst;
3406 		c = dstlen - 1;
3407 		while (	   c-- > 0
3408 			&& *tail
3409 			&& vim_isfilec(*tail)
3410 			&& !vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3411 		    *var++ = *tail++;
3412 		*var = NUL;
3413 # ifdef UNIX
3414 		/*
3415 		 * If the system supports getpwnam(), use it.
3416 		 * Otherwise, or if getpwnam() fails, the shell is used to
3417 		 * expand ~user.  This is slower and may fail if the shell
3418 		 * does not support ~user (old versions of /bin/sh).
3419 		 */
3420 #  if defined(HAVE_GETPWNAM) && defined(HAVE_PWD_H)
3421 		{
3422 		    struct passwd *pw;
3423 
3424 		    pw = getpwnam((char *)dst + 1);
3425 		    if (pw != NULL)
3426 			var = (char_u *)pw->pw_dir;
3427 		    else
3428 			var = NULL;
3429 		}
3430 		if (var == NULL)
3431 #  endif
3432 		{
3433 		    expand_T	xpc;
3434 
3435 		    ExpandInit(&xpc);
3436 		    xpc.xp_context = EXPAND_FILES;
3437 		    var = ExpandOne(&xpc, dst, NULL,
3438 				WILD_ADD_SLASH|WILD_SILENT, WILD_EXPAND_FREE);
3439 		    ExpandCleanup(&xpc);
3440 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3441 		}
3442 
3443 # else	/* !UNIX, thus VMS */
3444 		/*
3445 		 * USER_HOME is a comma-separated list of
3446 		 * directories to search for the user account in.
3447 		 */
3448 		{
3449 		    char_u	test[MAXPATHL], paths[MAXPATHL];
3450 		    char_u	*path, *next_path, *ptr;
3451 		    struct stat	st;
3452 
3453 		    STRCPY(paths, USER_HOME);
3454 		    next_path = paths;
3455 		    while (*next_path)
3456 		    {
3457 			for (path = next_path; *next_path && *next_path != ',';
3458 				next_path++);
3459 			if (*next_path)
3460 			    *next_path++ = NUL;
3461 			STRCPY(test, path);
3462 			STRCAT(test, "/");
3463 			STRCAT(test, dst + 1);
3464 			if (mch_stat(test, &st) == 0)
3465 			{
3466 			    var = alloc(STRLEN(test) + 1);
3467 			    STRCPY(var, test);
3468 			    mustfree = TRUE;
3469 			    break;
3470 			}
3471 		    }
3472 		}
3473 # endif /* UNIX */
3474 #else
3475 		/* cannot expand user's home directory, so don't try */
3476 		var = NULL;
3477 		tail = (char_u *)"";	/* for gcc */
3478 #endif /* UNIX || VMS */
3479 	    }
3480 
3481 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
3482 	    /* If 'shellslash' is set change backslashes to forward slashes.
3483 	     * Can't use slash_adjust(), p_ssl may be set temporarily. */
3484 	    if (p_ssl && var != NULL && vim_strchr(var, '\\') != NULL)
3485 	    {
3486 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave(var);
3487 
3488 		if (p != NULL)
3489 		{
3490 		    if (mustfree)
3491 			vim_free(var);
3492 		    var = p;
3493 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3494 		    forward_slash(var);
3495 		}
3496 	    }
3497 #endif
3498 
3499 	    /* If "var" contains white space, escape it with a backslash.
3500 	     * Required for ":e ~/tt" when $HOME includes a space. */
3501 	    if (esc && var != NULL && vim_strpbrk(var, (char_u *)" \t") != NULL)
3502 	    {
3503 		char_u	*p = vim_strsave_escaped(var, (char_u *)" \t");
3504 
3505 		if (p != NULL)
3506 		{
3507 		    if (mustfree)
3508 			vim_free(var);
3509 		    var = p;
3510 		    mustfree = TRUE;
3511 		}
3512 	    }
3513 
3514 	    if (var != NULL && *var != NUL
3515 		    && (STRLEN(var) + STRLEN(tail) + 1 < (unsigned)dstlen))
3516 	    {
3517 		STRCPY(dst, var);
3518 		dstlen -= (int)STRLEN(var);
3519 		dst += STRLEN(var);
3520 		/* if var[] ends in a path separator and tail[] starts
3521 		 * with it, skip a character */
3522 		if (*var != NUL && vim_ispathsep(dst[-1])
3523 #if defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME) || defined(AMIGA)
3524 			&& dst[-1] != ':'
3525 #endif
3526 			&& vim_ispathsep(*tail))
3527 		    ++tail;
3528 		src = tail;
3529 		copy_char = FALSE;
3530 	    }
3531 	    if (mustfree)
3532 		vim_free(var);
3533 	}
3534 
3535 	if (copy_char)	    /* copy at least one char */
3536 	{
3537 	    /*
3538 	     * Recogize the start of a new name, for '~'.
3539 	     */
3540 	    at_start = FALSE;
3541 	    if (src[0] == '\\' && src[1] != NUL)
3542 	    {
3543 		*dst++ = *src++;
3544 		--dstlen;
3545 	    }
3546 	    else if (src[0] == ' ' || src[0] == ',')
3547 		at_start = TRUE;
3548 	    *dst++ = *src++;
3549 	    --dstlen;
3550 	}
3551     }
3552     *dst = NUL;
3553 }
3554 
3555 /*
3556  * Vim's version of getenv().
3557  * Special handling of $HOME, $VIM and $VIMRUNTIME.
3558  */
3559     char_u *
3560 vim_getenv(name, mustfree)
3561     char_u	*name;
3562     int		*mustfree;	/* set to TRUE when returned is allocated */
3563 {
3564     char_u	*p;
3565     char_u	*pend;
3566     int		vimruntime;
3567 
3568 #if defined(OS2) || defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN)
3569     /* use "C:/" when $HOME is not set */
3570     if (STRCMP(name, "HOME") == 0)
3571 	return homedir;
3572 #endif
3573 
3574     p = mch_getenv(name);
3575     if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3576 	p = NULL;
3577 
3578     if (p != NULL)
3579 	return p;
3580 
3581     vimruntime = (STRCMP(name, "VIMRUNTIME") == 0);
3582     if (!vimruntime && STRCMP(name, "VIM") != 0)
3583 	return NULL;
3584 
3585     /*
3586      * When expanding $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using $VIM/vim<version> or $VIM.
3587      * Don't do this when default_vimruntime_dir is non-empty.
3588      */
3589     if (vimruntime
3590 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3591 	    && *default_vimruntime_dir == NUL
3592 #endif
3593        )
3594     {
3595 	p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3596 	if (p != NULL && *p == NUL)	    /* empty is the same as not set */
3597 	    p = NULL;
3598 	if (p != NULL)
3599 	{
3600 	    p = vim_version_dir(p);
3601 	    if (p != NULL)
3602 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3603 	    else
3604 		p = mch_getenv((char_u *)"VIM");
3605 	}
3606     }
3607 
3608     /*
3609      * When expanding $VIM or $VIMRUNTIME fails, try using:
3610      * - the directory name from 'helpfile' (unless it contains '$')
3611      * - the executable name from argv[0]
3612      */
3613     if (p == NULL)
3614     {
3615 	if (p_hf != NULL && vim_strchr(p_hf, '$') == NULL)
3616 	    p = p_hf;
3617 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3618 	/*
3619 	 * Use the name of the executable, obtained from argv[0].
3620 	 */
3621 	else
3622 	    p = exe_name;
3623 #endif
3624 	if (p != NULL)
3625 	{
3626 	    /* remove the file name */
3627 	    pend = gettail(p);
3628 
3629 	    /* remove "doc/" from 'helpfile', if present */
3630 	    if (p == p_hf)
3631 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"doc");
3632 
3633 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3634 # ifdef MACOS_X
3635 	    /* remove "build/..." from exe_name, if present */
3636 	    if (p == exe_name)
3637 	    {
3638 		char_u	*pend1;
3639 		char_u  *pend2;
3640 
3641 		pend1 = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"Contents/MacOS");
3642 		pend2 = remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend1, (char_u *)".app");
3643 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend2, (char_u *)"build");
3644 		/* When runnig from project builder get rid of the
3645 		 * build/???.app, otherwise keep the ???.app */
3646 		if (pend2 == pend)
3647 		    pend = pend1;
3648 	    }
3649 # endif
3650 	    /* remove "src/" from exe_name, if present */
3651 	    if (p == exe_name)
3652 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)"src");
3653 #endif
3654 
3655 	    /* for $VIM, remove "runtime/" or "vim54/", if present */
3656 	    if (!vimruntime)
3657 	    {
3658 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME);
3659 		pend = remove_tail(p, pend, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT);
3660 	    }
3661 
3662 	    /* remove trailing path separator */
3663 #ifndef MACOS_CLASSIC
3664 	    /* With MacOS path (with  colons) the final colon is required */
3665 	    /* to avoid confusion between absoulute and relative path */
3666 	    if (pend > p && vim_ispathsep(*(pend - 1)))
3667 		--pend;
3668 #endif
3669 
3670 	    /* check that the result is a directory name */
3671 	    p = vim_strnsave(p, (int)(pend - p));
3672 
3673 	    if (p != NULL && !mch_isdir(p))
3674 	    {
3675 		vim_free(p);
3676 		p = NULL;
3677 	    }
3678 	    else
3679 	    {
3680 #ifdef USE_EXE_NAME
3681 		/* may add "/vim54" or "/runtime" if it exists */
3682 		if (vimruntime && (pend = vim_version_dir(p)) != NULL)
3683 		{
3684 		    vim_free(p);
3685 		    p = pend;
3686 		}
3687 #endif
3688 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3689 	    }
3690 	}
3691     }
3692 
3693 #ifdef HAVE_PATHDEF
3694     /* When there is a pathdef.c file we can use default_vim_dir and
3695      * default_vimruntime_dir */
3696     if (p == NULL)
3697     {
3698 	/* Only use default_vimruntime_dir when it is not empty */
3699 	if (vimruntime && *default_vimruntime_dir != NUL)
3700 	{
3701 	    p = default_vimruntime_dir;
3702 	    *mustfree = FALSE;
3703 	}
3704 	else if (*default_vim_dir != NUL)
3705 	{
3706 	    if (vimruntime && (p = vim_version_dir(default_vim_dir)) != NULL)
3707 		*mustfree = TRUE;
3708 	    else
3709 	    {
3710 		p = default_vim_dir;
3711 		*mustfree = FALSE;
3712 	    }
3713 	}
3714     }
3715 #endif
3716 
3717     /*
3718      * Set the environment variable, so that the new value can be found fast
3719      * next time, and others can also use it (e.g. Perl).
3720      */
3721     if (p != NULL)
3722     {
3723 	if (vimruntime)
3724 	{
3725 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIMRUNTIME", p);
3726 	    didset_vimruntime = TRUE;
3727 #ifdef FEAT_GETTEXT
3728 	    {
3729 		char_u	*buf = alloc((unsigned int)STRLEN(p) + 6);
3730 
3731 		if (buf != NULL)
3732 		{
3733 		    STRCPY(buf, p);
3734 		    STRCAT(buf, "/lang");
3735 		    bindtextdomain(VIMPACKAGE, (char *)buf);
3736 		    vim_free(buf);
3737 		}
3738 	    }
3739 #endif
3740 	}
3741 	else
3742 	{
3743 	    vim_setenv((char_u *)"VIM", p);
3744 	    didset_vim = TRUE;
3745 	}
3746     }
3747     return p;
3748 }
3749 
3750 /*
3751  * Check if the directory "vimdir/<version>" or "vimdir/runtime" exists.
3752  * Return NULL if not, return its name in allocated memory otherwise.
3753  */
3754     static char_u *
3755 vim_version_dir(vimdir)
3756     char_u	*vimdir;
3757 {
3758     char_u	*p;
3759 
3760     if (vimdir == NULL || *vimdir == NUL)
3761 	return NULL;
3762     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)VIM_VERSION_NODOT, TRUE);
3763     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3764 	return p;
3765     vim_free(p);
3766     p = concat_fnames(vimdir, (char_u *)RUNTIME_DIRNAME, TRUE);
3767     if (p != NULL && mch_isdir(p))
3768 	return p;
3769     vim_free(p);
3770     return NULL;
3771 }
3772 
3773 /*
3774  * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "name/", return "pend" minus
3775  * the length of "name/".  Otherwise return "pend".
3776  */
3777     static char_u *
3778 remove_tail(p, pend, name)
3779     char_u	*p;
3780     char_u	*pend;
3781     char_u	*name;
3782 {
3783     int		len = (int)STRLEN(name) + 1;
3784     char_u	*newend = pend - len;
3785 
3786     if (newend >= p
3787 	    && fnamencmp(newend, name, len - 1) == 0
3788 	    && (newend == p || vim_ispathsep(*(newend - 1))))
3789 	return newend;
3790     return pend;
3791 }
3792 
3793 #if defined(USE_EXE_NAME) && defined(MACOS_X)
3794 /*
3795  * If the string between "p" and "pend" ends in "???.ext/", return "pend"
3796  * minus the length of "???.ext/".  Otherwise return "pend".
3797  */
3798     static char_u *
3799 remove_tail_with_ext(p, pend, ext)
3800     char_u	*p;
3801     char_u	*pend;
3802     char_u	*ext;
3803 {
3804     int		len = (int)STRLEN(ext) + 1;
3805     char_u	*newend = pend - len;
3806 
3807     if (newend >= p && fnamencmp(newend, ext, len - 1) == 0)
3808 	while (newend != p && !vim_ispathsep(*(newend - 1)))
3809 	    --newend;
3810     if (newend == p || vim_ispathsep(*(newend - 1)))
3811 	return newend;
3812     return pend;
3813 }
3814 #endif
3815 
3816 /*
3817  * Call expand_env() and store the result in an allocated string.
3818  * This is not very memory efficient, this expects the result to be freed
3819  * again soon.
3820  */
3821     char_u *
3822 expand_env_save(src)
3823     char_u	*src;
3824 {
3825     char_u	*p;
3826 
3827     p = alloc(MAXPATHL);
3828     if (p != NULL)
3829 	expand_env(src, p, MAXPATHL);
3830     return p;
3831 }
3832 
3833 /*
3834  * Our portable version of setenv.
3835  */
3836     void
3837 vim_setenv(name, val)
3838     char_u	*name;
3839     char_u	*val;
3840 {
3841 #ifdef HAVE_SETENV
3842     mch_setenv((char *)name, (char *)val, 1);
3843 #else
3844     char_u	*envbuf;
3845 
3846     /*
3847      * Putenv does not copy the string, it has to remain
3848      * valid.  The allocated memory will never be freed.
3849      */
3850     envbuf = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(name) + STRLEN(val) + 2));
3851     if (envbuf != NULL)
3852     {
3853 	sprintf((char *)envbuf, "%s=%s", name, val);
3854 	putenv((char *)envbuf);
3855     }
3856 #endif
3857 }
3858 
3859 #if defined(FEAT_CMDL_COMPL) || defined(PROTO)
3860 /*
3861  * Function given to ExpandGeneric() to obtain an environment variable name.
3862  */
3863 /*ARGSUSED*/
3864     char_u *
3865 get_env_name(xp, idx)
3866     expand_T	*xp;
3867     int		idx;
3868 {
3869 # if defined(AMIGA) || defined(__MRC__) || defined(__SC__)
3870     /*
3871      * No environ[] on the Amiga and on the Mac (using MPW).
3872      */
3873     return NULL;
3874 # else
3875 # ifndef __WIN32__
3876     /* Borland C++ 5.2 has this in a header file. */
3877     extern char		**environ;
3878 # endif
3879 # define ENVNAMELEN 100
3880     static char_u	name[ENVNAMELEN];
3881     char_u		*str;
3882     int			n;
3883 
3884     str = (char_u *)environ[idx];
3885     if (str == NULL)
3886 	return NULL;
3887 
3888     for (n = 0; n < ENVNAMELEN - 1; ++n)
3889     {
3890 	if (str[n] == '=' || str[n] == NUL)
3891 	    break;
3892 	name[n] = str[n];
3893     }
3894     name[n] = NUL;
3895     return name;
3896 # endif
3897 }
3898 #endif
3899 
3900 /*
3901  * Replace home directory by "~" in each space or comma separated file name in
3902  * 'src'.
3903  * If anything fails (except when out of space) dst equals src.
3904  */
3905     void
3906 home_replace(buf, src, dst, dstlen, one)
3907     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
3908     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
3909     char_u	*dst;	/* where to put the result */
3910     int		dstlen;	/* maximum length of the result */
3911     int		one;	/* if TRUE, only replace one file name, include
3912 			   spaces and commas in the file name. */
3913 {
3914     size_t	dirlen = 0, envlen = 0;
3915     size_t	len;
3916     char_u	*homedir_env;
3917     char_u	*p;
3918 
3919     if (src == NULL)
3920     {
3921 	*dst = NUL;
3922 	return;
3923     }
3924 
3925     /*
3926      * If the file is a help file, remove the path completely.
3927      */
3928     if (buf != NULL && buf->b_help)
3929     {
3930 	STRCPY(dst, gettail(src));
3931 	return;
3932     }
3933 
3934     /*
3935      * We check both the value of the $HOME environment variable and the
3936      * "real" home directory.
3937      */
3938     if (homedir != NULL)
3939 	dirlen = STRLEN(homedir);
3940 
3941 #ifdef VMS
3942     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"SYS$LOGIN");
3943 #else
3944     homedir_env = mch_getenv((char_u *)"HOME");
3945 #endif
3946 
3947     if (homedir_env != NULL && *homedir_env == NUL)
3948 	homedir_env = NULL;
3949     if (homedir_env != NULL)
3950 	envlen = STRLEN(homedir_env);
3951 
3952     if (!one)
3953 	src = skipwhite(src);
3954     while (*src && dstlen > 0)
3955     {
3956 	/*
3957 	 * Here we are at the beginning of a file name.
3958 	 * First, check to see if the beginning of the file name matches
3959 	 * $HOME or the "real" home directory. Check that there is a '/'
3960 	 * after the match (so that if e.g. the file is "/home/pieter/bla",
3961 	 * and the home directory is "/home/piet", the file does not end up
3962 	 * as "~er/bla" (which would seem to indicate the file "bla" in user
3963 	 * er's home directory)).
3964 	 */
3965 	p = homedir;
3966 	len = dirlen;
3967 	for (;;)
3968 	{
3969 	    if (   len
3970 		&& fnamencmp(src, p, len) == 0
3971 		&& (vim_ispathsep(src[len])
3972 		    || (!one && (src[len] == ',' || src[len] == ' '))
3973 		    || src[len] == NUL))
3974 	    {
3975 		src += len;
3976 		if (--dstlen > 0)
3977 		    *dst++ = '~';
3978 
3979 		/*
3980 		 * If it's just the home directory, add  "/".
3981 		 */
3982 		if (!vim_ispathsep(src[0]) && --dstlen > 0)
3983 		    *dst++ = '/';
3984 		break;
3985 	    }
3986 	    if (p == homedir_env)
3987 		break;
3988 	    p = homedir_env;
3989 	    len = envlen;
3990 	}
3991 
3992 	/* if (!one) skip to separator: space or comma */
3993 	while (*src && (one || (*src != ',' && *src != ' ')) && --dstlen > 0)
3994 	    *dst++ = *src++;
3995 	/* skip separator */
3996 	while ((*src == ' ' || *src == ',') && --dstlen > 0)
3997 	    *dst++ = *src++;
3998     }
3999     /* if (dstlen == 0) out of space, what to do??? */
4000 
4001     *dst = NUL;
4002 }
4003 
4004 /*
4005  * Like home_replace, store the replaced string in allocated memory.
4006  * When something fails, NULL is returned.
4007  */
4008     char_u  *
4009 home_replace_save(buf, src)
4010     buf_T	*buf;	/* when not NULL, check for help files */
4011     char_u	*src;	/* input file name */
4012 {
4013     char_u	*dst;
4014     unsigned	len;
4015 
4016     len = 3;			/* space for "~/" and trailing NUL */
4017     if (src != NULL)		/* just in case */
4018 	len += (unsigned)STRLEN(src);
4019     dst = alloc(len);
4020     if (dst != NULL)
4021 	home_replace(buf, src, dst, len, TRUE);
4022     return dst;
4023 }
4024 
4025 /*
4026  * Compare two file names and return:
4027  * FPC_SAME   if they both exist and are the same file.
4028  * FPC_SAMEX  if they both don't exist and have the same file name.
4029  * FPC_DIFF   if they both exist and are different files.
4030  * FPC_NOTX   if they both don't exist.
4031  * FPC_DIFFX  if one of them doesn't exist.
4032  * For the first name environment variables are expanded
4033  */
4034     int
4035 fullpathcmp(s1, s2, checkname)
4036     char_u *s1, *s2;
4037     int	    checkname;		/* when both don't exist, check file names */
4038 {
4039 #ifdef UNIX
4040     char_u	    exp1[MAXPATHL];
4041     char_u	    full1[MAXPATHL];
4042     char_u	    full2[MAXPATHL];
4043     struct stat	    st1, st2;
4044     int		    r1, r2;
4045 
4046     expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4047     r1 = mch_stat((char *)exp1, &st1);
4048     r2 = mch_stat((char *)s2, &st2);
4049     if (r1 != 0 && r2 != 0)
4050     {
4051 	/* if mch_stat() doesn't work, may compare the names */
4052 	if (checkname)
4053 	{
4054 	    if (fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4055 		return FPC_SAMEX;
4056 	    r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4057 	    r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4058 	    if (r1 == OK && r2 == OK && fnamecmp(full1, full2) == 0)
4059 		return FPC_SAMEX;
4060 	}
4061 	return FPC_NOTX;
4062     }
4063     if (r1 != 0 || r2 != 0)
4064 	return FPC_DIFFX;
4065     if (st1.st_dev == st2.st_dev && st1.st_ino == st2.st_ino)
4066 	return FPC_SAME;
4067     return FPC_DIFF;
4068 #else
4069     char_u  *exp1;		/* expanded s1 */
4070     char_u  *full1;		/* full path of s1 */
4071     char_u  *full2;		/* full path of s2 */
4072     int	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4073     int	    r1, r2;
4074 
4075     /* allocate one buffer to store three paths (alloc()/free() is slow!) */
4076     if ((exp1 = alloc(MAXPATHL * 3)) != NULL)
4077     {
4078 	full1 = exp1 + MAXPATHL;
4079 	full2 = full1 + MAXPATHL;
4080 
4081 	expand_env(s1, exp1, MAXPATHL);
4082 	r1 = vim_FullName(exp1, full1, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4083 	r2 = vim_FullName(s2, full2, MAXPATHL, FALSE);
4084 
4085 	/* If vim_FullName() fails, the file probably doesn't exist. */
4086 	if (r1 != OK && r2 != OK)
4087 	{
4088 	    if (checkname && fnamecmp(exp1, s2) == 0)
4089 		retval = FPC_SAMEX;
4090 	    else
4091 		retval = FPC_NOTX;
4092 	}
4093 	else if (r1 != OK || r2 != OK)
4094 	    retval = FPC_DIFFX;
4095 	else if (fnamecmp(full1, full2))
4096 	    retval = FPC_DIFF;
4097 	else
4098 	    retval = FPC_SAME;
4099 	vim_free(exp1);
4100     }
4101     return retval;
4102 #endif
4103 }
4104 
4105 /*
4106  * Get the tail of a path: the file name.
4107  * Fail safe: never returns NULL.
4108  */
4109     char_u *
4110 gettail(fname)
4111     char_u *fname;
4112 {
4113     char_u  *p1, *p2;
4114 
4115     if (fname == NULL)
4116 	return (char_u *)"";
4117     for (p1 = p2 = fname; *p2; )	/* find last part of path */
4118     {
4119 	if (vim_ispathsep(*p2))
4120 	    p1 = p2 + 1;
4121 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
4122 	if (has_mbyte)
4123 	    p2 += (*mb_ptr2len_check)(p2);
4124 	else
4125 #endif
4126 	    ++p2;
4127     }
4128     return p1;
4129 }
4130 
4131 /*
4132  * get the next path component (just after the next path separator).
4133  */
4134     char_u *
4135 getnextcomp(fname)
4136     char_u *fname;
4137 {
4138     while (*fname && !vim_ispathsep(*fname))
4139 	++fname;
4140     if (*fname)
4141 	++fname;
4142     return fname;
4143 }
4144 
4145 #if defined(FEAT_MODIFY_FNAME) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) \
4146 	|| defined(FEAT_SESSION) || defined(MSWIN) \
4147 	|| ((defined(FEAT_GUI_GTK) || defined(FEAT_GUI_KDE)) \
4148 			    && (defined(FEAT_WINDOWS) || defined(FEAT_DND))) \
4149 	|| defined(FEAT_SUN_WORKSHOP) || defined(FEAT_NETBEANS_INTG) \
4150 	|| defined(PROTO)
4151 /*
4152  * Get a pointer to one character past the head of a path name.
4153  * Unix: after "/"; DOS: after "c:\"; Amiga: after "disk:/"; Mac: no head.
4154  * If there is no head, path is returned.
4155  */
4156     char_u *
4157 get_past_head(path)
4158     char_u  *path;
4159 {
4160     char_u  *retval;
4161 
4162 #if defined(MSDOS) || defined(MSWIN) || defined(OS2)
4163     /* may skip "c:" */
4164     if (isalpha(path[0]) && path[1] == ':')
4165 	retval = path + 2;
4166     else
4167 	retval = path;
4168 #else
4169 # if defined(AMIGA)
4170     /* may skip "label:" */
4171     retval = vim_strchr(path, ':');
4172     if (retval == NULL)
4173 	retval = path;
4174 # else	/* Unix */
4175     retval = path;
4176 # endif
4177 #endif
4178 
4179     while (vim_ispathsep(*retval))
4180 	++retval;
4181 
4182     return retval;
4183 }
4184 #endif
4185 
4186 /*
4187  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path separator.
4188  */
4189     int
4190 vim_ispathsep(c)
4191     int c;
4192 {
4193 #ifdef RISCOS
4194     return (c == '.' || c == ':');
4195 #else
4196 # ifdef UNIX
4197     return (c == '/');	    /* UNIX has ':' inside file names */
4198 # else
4199 #  ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
4200     return (c == ':' || c == '/' || c == '\\');
4201 #  else
4202 #   ifdef VMS
4203     /* server"user passwd"::device:[full.path.name]fname.extension;version" */
4204     return (c == ':' || c == '[' || c == ']' || c == '/'
4205 	    || c == '<' || c == '>' || c == '"' );
4206 #   else
4207 #    ifdef COLON_AS_PATHSEP
4208     return (c == ':');
4209 #    else		/* Amiga */
4210     return (c == ':' || c == '/');
4211 #    endif
4212 #   endif /* VMS */
4213 #  endif
4214 # endif
4215 #endif /* RISC OS */
4216 }
4217 
4218 #if defined(FEAT_SEARCHPATH) || defined(PROTO)
4219 /*
4220  * return TRUE if 'c' is a path list separator.
4221  */
4222     int
4223 vim_ispathlistsep(c)
4224     int c;
4225 {
4226 #ifdef UNIX
4227     return (c == ':');
4228 #else
4229     return (c == ';');	/* might not be rigth for every system... */
4230 #endif
4231 }
4232 #endif
4233 
4234 #if (defined(CASE_INSENSITIVE_FILENAME) && defined(BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME)) \
4235 	|| defined(PROTO)
4236 /*
4237  * Versions of fnamecmp() and fnamencmp() that handle '/' and '\' equally.
4238  */
4239     int
4240 vim_fnamecmp(x, y)
4241     char_u	*x, *y;
4242 {
4243     return vim_fnamencmp(x, y, MAXPATHL);
4244 }
4245 
4246     int
4247 vim_fnamencmp(x, y, len)
4248     char_u	*x, *y;
4249     size_t	len;
4250 {
4251     while (len > 0 && *x && *y)
4252     {
4253 	if (TOLOWER_LOC(*x) != TOLOWER_LOC(*y)
4254 		&& !(*x == '/' && *y == '\\')
4255 		&& !(*x == '\\' && *y == '/'))
4256 	    break;
4257 	++x;
4258 	++y;
4259 	--len;
4260     }
4261     if (len == 0)
4262 	return 0;
4263     return (*x - *y);
4264 }
4265 #endif
4266 
4267 /*
4268  * Concatenate file names fname1 and fname2 into allocated memory.
4269  * Only add a '/' or '\\' when 'sep' is TRUE and it is neccesary.
4270  */
4271     char_u  *
4272 concat_fnames(fname1, fname2, sep)
4273     char_u  *fname1;
4274     char_u  *fname2;
4275     int	    sep;
4276 {
4277     char_u  *dest;
4278 
4279     dest = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(fname1) + STRLEN(fname2) + 3));
4280     if (dest != NULL)
4281     {
4282 	STRCPY(dest, fname1);
4283 	if (sep)
4284 	    add_pathsep(dest);
4285 	STRCAT(dest, fname2);
4286     }
4287     return dest;
4288 }
4289 
4290 /*
4291  * Add a path separator to a file name, unless it already ends in a path
4292  * separator.
4293  */
4294     void
4295 add_pathsep(p)
4296     char_u	*p;
4297 {
4298     if (*p != NUL && !vim_ispathsep(*(p + STRLEN(p) - 1)))
4299 	STRCAT(p, PATHSEPSTR);
4300 }
4301 
4302 /*
4303  * FullName_save - Make an allocated copy of a full file name.
4304  * Returns NULL when out of memory.
4305  */
4306     char_u  *
4307 FullName_save(fname, force)
4308     char_u	*fname;
4309     int		force;	    /* force expansion, even when it already looks
4310 			       like a full path name */
4311 {
4312     char_u	*buf;
4313     char_u	*new_fname = NULL;
4314 
4315     if (fname == NULL)
4316 	return NULL;
4317 
4318     buf = alloc((unsigned)MAXPATHL);
4319     if (buf != NULL)
4320     {
4321 	if (vim_FullName(fname, buf, MAXPATHL, force) != FAIL)
4322 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(buf);
4323 	else
4324 	    new_fname = vim_strsave(fname);
4325 	vim_free(buf);
4326     }
4327     return new_fname;
4328 }
4329 
4330 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(FEAT_SYN_HL)
4331 
4332 static char_u	*skip_string __ARGS((char_u *p));
4333 
4334 /*
4335  * Find the start of a comment, not knowing if we are in a comment right now.
4336  * Search starts at w_cursor.lnum and goes backwards.
4337  */
4338     pos_T *
4339 find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
4340     int		ind_maxcomment;
4341 {
4342     pos_T	*pos;
4343     char_u	*line;
4344     char_u	*p;
4345 
4346     if ((pos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '*', FM_BACKWARD, ind_maxcomment)) == NULL)
4347 	return NULL;
4348 
4349     /*
4350      * Check if the comment start we found is inside a string.
4351      */
4352     line = ml_get(pos->lnum);
4353     for (p = line; *p && (unsigned)(p - line) < pos->col; ++p)
4354 	p = skip_string(p);
4355     if ((unsigned)(p - line) > pos->col)
4356 	return NULL;
4357     return pos;
4358 }
4359 
4360 /*
4361  * Skip to the end of a "string" and a 'c' character.
4362  * If there is no string or character, return argument unmodified.
4363  */
4364     static char_u *
4365 skip_string(p)
4366     char_u  *p;
4367 {
4368     int	    i;
4369 
4370     /*
4371      * We loop, because strings may be concatenated: "date""time".
4372      */
4373     for ( ; ; ++p)
4374     {
4375 	if (p[0] == '\'')		    /* 'c' or '\n' or '\000' */
4376 	{
4377 	    if (!p[1])			    /* ' at end of line */
4378 		break;
4379 	    i = 2;
4380 	    if (p[1] == '\\')		    /* '\n' or '\000' */
4381 	    {
4382 		++i;
4383 		while (vim_isdigit(p[i - 1]))   /* '\000' */
4384 		    ++i;
4385 	    }
4386 	    if (p[i] == '\'')		    /* check for trailing ' */
4387 	    {
4388 		p += i;
4389 		continue;
4390 	    }
4391 	}
4392 	else if (p[0] == '"')		    /* start of string */
4393 	{
4394 	    for (++p; p[0]; ++p)
4395 	    {
4396 		if (p[0] == '\\' && p[1] != NUL)
4397 		    ++p;
4398 		else if (p[0] == '"')	    /* end of string */
4399 		    break;
4400 	    }
4401 	    if (p[0] == '"')
4402 		continue;
4403 	}
4404 	break;				    /* no string found */
4405     }
4406     if (!*p)
4407 	--p;				    /* backup from NUL */
4408     return p;
4409 }
4410 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT || FEAT_SYN_HL */
4411 
4412 #if defined(FEAT_CINDENT) || defined(PROTO)
4413 
4414 /*
4415  * Do C or expression indenting on the current line.
4416  */
4417     void
4418 do_c_expr_indent()
4419 {
4420 # ifdef FEAT_EVAL
4421     if (*curbuf->b_p_inde != NUL)
4422 	fixthisline(get_expr_indent);
4423     else
4424 # endif
4425 	fixthisline(get_c_indent);
4426 }
4427 
4428 /*
4429  * Functions for C-indenting.
4430  * Most of this originally comes from Eric Fischer.
4431  */
4432 /*
4433  * Below "XXX" means that this function may unlock the current line.
4434  */
4435 
4436 static char_u	*cin_skipcomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4437 static int	cin_nocode __ARGS((char_u *));
4438 static pos_T	*find_line_comment __ARGS((void));
4439 static int	cin_islabel_skip __ARGS((char_u **));
4440 static int	cin_isdefault __ARGS((char_u *));
4441 static char_u	*after_label __ARGS((char_u *l));
4442 static int	get_indent_nolabel __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4443 static int	skip_label __ARGS((linenr_T, char_u **pp, int ind_maxcomment));
4444 static int	cin_first_id_amount __ARGS((void));
4445 static int	cin_get_equal_amount __ARGS((linenr_T lnum));
4446 static int	cin_ispreproc __ARGS((char_u *));
4447 static int	cin_ispreproc_cont __ARGS((char_u **pp, linenr_T *lnump));
4448 static int	cin_iscomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4449 static int	cin_islinecomment __ARGS((char_u *));
4450 static int	cin_isterminated __ARGS((char_u *, int, int));
4451 static int	cin_isinit __ARGS((void));
4452 static int	cin_isfuncdecl __ARGS((char_u **, linenr_T));
4453 static int	cin_isif __ARGS((char_u *));
4454 static int	cin_iselse __ARGS((char_u *));
4455 static int	cin_isdo __ARGS((char_u *));
4456 static int	cin_iswhileofdo __ARGS((char_u *, linenr_T, int));
4457 static int	cin_isbreak __ARGS((char_u *));
4458 static int	cin_is_cpp_baseclass __ARGS((char_u *line, colnr_T *col));
4459 static int	cin_ends_in __ARGS((char_u *, char_u *, char_u *));
4460 static int	cin_skip2pos __ARGS((pos_T *trypos));
4461 static pos_T	*find_start_brace __ARGS((int));
4462 static pos_T	*find_match_paren __ARGS((int, int));
4463 static int	corr_ind_maxparen __ARGS((int ind_maxparen, pos_T *startpos));
4464 static int	find_last_paren __ARGS((char_u *l, int start, int end));
4465 static int	find_match __ARGS((int lookfor, linenr_T ourscope, int ind_maxparen, int ind_maxcomment));
4466 
4467 /*
4468  * Skip over white space and C comments within the line.
4469  */
4470     static char_u *
4471 cin_skipcomment(s)
4472     char_u	*s;
4473 {
4474     while (*s)
4475     {
4476 	s = skipwhite(s);
4477 	if (*s != '/')
4478 	    break;
4479 	++s;
4480 	if (*s == '/')		/* slash-slash comment continues till eol */
4481 	{
4482 	    s += STRLEN(s);
4483 	    break;
4484 	}
4485 	if (*s != '*')
4486 	    break;
4487 	for (++s; *s; ++s)	/* skip slash-star comment */
4488 	    if (s[0] == '*' && s[1] == '/')
4489 	    {
4490 		s += 2;
4491 		break;
4492 	    }
4493     }
4494     return s;
4495 }
4496 
4497 /*
4498  * Return TRUE if there there is no code at *s.  White space and comments are
4499  * not considered code.
4500  */
4501     static int
4502 cin_nocode(s)
4503     char_u	*s;
4504 {
4505     return *cin_skipcomment(s) == NUL;
4506 }
4507 
4508 /*
4509  * Check previous lines for a "//" line comment, skipping over blank lines.
4510  */
4511     static pos_T *
4512 find_line_comment() /* XXX */
4513 {
4514     static pos_T pos;
4515     char_u	 *line;
4516     char_u	 *p;
4517 
4518     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
4519     while (--pos.lnum > 0)
4520     {
4521 	line = ml_get(pos.lnum);
4522 	p = skipwhite(line);
4523 	if (cin_islinecomment(p))
4524 	{
4525 	    pos.col = (int)(p - line);
4526 	    return &pos;
4527 	}
4528 	if (*p != NUL)
4529 	    break;
4530     }
4531     return NULL;
4532 }
4533 
4534 /*
4535  * Check if string matches "label:"; move to character after ':' if true.
4536  */
4537     static int
4538 cin_islabel_skip(s)
4539     char_u	**s;
4540 {
4541     if (!vim_isIDc(**s))	    /* need at least one ID character */
4542 	return FALSE;
4543 
4544     while (vim_isIDc(**s))
4545 	(*s)++;
4546 
4547     *s = cin_skipcomment(*s);
4548 
4549     /* "::" is not a label, it's C++ */
4550     return (**s == ':' && *++*s != ':');
4551 }
4552 
4553 /*
4554  * Recognize a label: "label:".
4555  * Note: curwin->w_cursor must be where we are looking for the label.
4556  */
4557     int
4558 cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment)		/* XXX */
4559     int		ind_maxcomment;
4560 {
4561     char_u	*s;
4562 
4563     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4564 
4565     /*
4566      * Exclude "default" from labels, since it should be indented
4567      * like a switch label.  Same for C++ scope declarations.
4568      */
4569     if (cin_isdefault(s))
4570 	return FALSE;
4571     if (cin_isscopedecl(s))
4572 	return FALSE;
4573 
4574     if (cin_islabel_skip(&s))
4575     {
4576 	/*
4577 	 * Only accept a label if the previous line is terminated or is a case
4578 	 * label.
4579 	 */
4580 	pos_T	cursor_save;
4581 	pos_T	*trypos;
4582 	char_u	*line;
4583 
4584 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4585 	while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
4586 	{
4587 	    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4588 
4589 	    /*
4590 	     * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
4591 	     */
4592 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
4593 	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
4594 		curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
4595 
4596 	    line = ml_get_curline();
4597 	    if (cin_ispreproc(line))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
4598 		continue;
4599 	    if (*(line = cin_skipcomment(line)) == NUL)
4600 		continue;
4601 
4602 	    curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4603 	    if (cin_isterminated(line, TRUE, FALSE)
4604 		    || cin_isscopedecl(line)
4605 		    || cin_iscase(line)
4606 		    || (cin_islabel_skip(&line) && cin_nocode(line)))
4607 		return TRUE;
4608 	    return FALSE;
4609 	}
4610 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4611 	return TRUE;		/* label at start of file??? */
4612     }
4613     return FALSE;
4614 }
4615 
4616 /*
4617  * Recognize structure initialization and enumerations.
4618  * Q&D-Implementation:
4619  * check for "=" at end or "[typedef] enum" at beginning of line.
4620  */
4621     static int
4622 cin_isinit(void)
4623 {
4624     char_u	*s;
4625 
4626     s = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
4627 
4628     if (STRNCMP(s, "typedef", 7) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[7]))
4629 	s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7);
4630 
4631     if (STRNCMP(s, "enum", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4632 	return TRUE;
4633 
4634     if (cin_ends_in(s, (char_u *)"=", (char_u *)"{"))
4635 	return TRUE;
4636 
4637     return FALSE;
4638 }
4639 
4640 /*
4641  * Recognize a switch label: "case .*:" or "default:".
4642  */
4643      int
4644 cin_iscase(s)
4645     char_u *s;
4646 {
4647     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4648     if (STRNCMP(s, "case", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[4]))
4649     {
4650 	for (s += 4; *s; ++s)
4651 	{
4652 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4653 	    if (*s == ':')
4654 	    {
4655 		if (s[1] == ':')	/* skip over "::" for C++ */
4656 		    ++s;
4657 		else
4658 		    return TRUE;
4659 	    }
4660 	    if (*s == '\'' && s[1] && s[2] == '\'')
4661 		s += 2;			/* skip over '.' */
4662 	    else if (*s == '/' && (s[1] == '*' || s[1] == '/'))
4663 		return FALSE;		/* stop at comment */
4664 	    else if (*s == '"')
4665 		return FALSE;		/* stop at string */
4666 	}
4667 	return FALSE;
4668     }
4669 
4670     if (cin_isdefault(s))
4671 	return TRUE;
4672     return FALSE;
4673 }
4674 
4675 /*
4676  * Recognize a "default" switch label.
4677  */
4678     static int
4679 cin_isdefault(s)
4680     char_u  *s;
4681 {
4682     return (STRNCMP(s, "default", 7) == 0
4683 	    && *(s = cin_skipcomment(s + 7)) == ':'
4684 	    && s[1] != ':');
4685 }
4686 
4687 /*
4688  * Recognize a "public/private/proctected" scope declaration label.
4689  */
4690     int
4691 cin_isscopedecl(s)
4692     char_u	*s;
4693 {
4694     int		i;
4695 
4696     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4697     if (STRNCMP(s, "public", 6) == 0)
4698 	i = 6;
4699     else if (STRNCMP(s, "protected", 9) == 0)
4700 	i = 9;
4701     else if (STRNCMP(s, "private", 7) == 0)
4702 	i = 7;
4703     else
4704 	return FALSE;
4705     return (*(s = cin_skipcomment(s + i)) == ':' && s[1] != ':');
4706 }
4707 
4708 /*
4709  * Return a pointer to the first non-empty non-comment character after a ':'.
4710  * Return NULL if not found.
4711  *	  case 234:    a = b;
4712  *		       ^
4713  */
4714     static char_u *
4715 after_label(l)
4716     char_u  *l;
4717 {
4718     for ( ; *l; ++l)
4719     {
4720 	if (*l == ':')
4721 	{
4722 	    if (l[1] == ':')	    /* skip over "::" for C++ */
4723 		++l;
4724 	    else if (!cin_iscase(l + 1))
4725 		break;
4726 	}
4727 	else if (*l == '\'' && l[1] && l[2] == '\'')
4728 	    l += 2;		    /* skip over 'x' */
4729     }
4730     if (*l == NUL)
4731 	return NULL;
4732     l = cin_skipcomment(l + 1);
4733     if (*l == NUL)
4734 	return NULL;
4735     return l;
4736 }
4737 
4738 /*
4739  * Get indent of line "lnum", skipping a label.
4740  * Return 0 if there is nothing after the label.
4741  */
4742     static int
4743 get_indent_nolabel(lnum)		/* XXX */
4744     linenr_T	lnum;
4745 {
4746     char_u	*l;
4747     pos_T	fp;
4748     colnr_T	col;
4749     char_u	*p;
4750 
4751     l = ml_get(lnum);
4752     p = after_label(l);
4753     if (p == NULL)
4754 	return 0;
4755 
4756     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - l);
4757     fp.lnum = lnum;
4758     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4759     return (int)col;
4760 }
4761 
4762 /*
4763  * Find indent for line "lnum", ignoring any case or jump label.
4764  * Also return a pointer to the text (after the label).
4765  *   label:	if (asdf && asdfasdf)
4766  *		^
4767  */
4768     static int
4769 skip_label(lnum, pp, ind_maxcomment)
4770     linenr_T	lnum;
4771     char_u	**pp;
4772     int		ind_maxcomment;
4773 {
4774     char_u	*l;
4775     int		amount;
4776     pos_T	cursor_save;
4777 
4778     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
4779     curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
4780     l = ml_get_curline();
4781 				    /* XXX */
4782     if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l) || cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
4783     {
4784 	amount = get_indent_nolabel(lnum);
4785 	l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
4786 	if (l == NULL)		/* just in case */
4787 	    l = ml_get_curline();
4788     }
4789     else
4790     {
4791 	amount = get_indent();
4792 	l = ml_get_curline();
4793     }
4794     *pp = l;
4795 
4796     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
4797     return amount;
4798 }
4799 
4800 /*
4801  * Return the indent of the first variable name after a type in a declaration.
4802  *  int	    a,			indent of "a"
4803  *  static struct foo    b,	indent of "b"
4804  *  enum bla    c,		indent of "c"
4805  * Returns zero when it doesn't look like a declaration.
4806  */
4807     static int
4808 cin_first_id_amount()
4809 {
4810     char_u	*line, *p, *s;
4811     int		len;
4812     pos_T	fp;
4813     colnr_T	col;
4814 
4815     line = ml_get_curline();
4816     p = skipwhite(line);
4817     len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
4818     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "static", 6) == 0)
4819     {
4820 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
4821 	len = skiptowhite(p) - p;
4822     }
4823     if (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "struct", 6) == 0)
4824 	p = skipwhite(p + 6);
4825     else if (len == 4 && STRNCMP(p, "enum", 4) == 0)
4826 	p = skipwhite(p + 4);
4827     else if ((len == 8 && STRNCMP(p, "unsigned", 8) == 0)
4828 	    || (len == 6 && STRNCMP(p, "signed", 6) == 0))
4829     {
4830 	s = skipwhite(p + len);
4831 	if ((STRNCMP(s, "int", 3) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[3]))
4832 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "long", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4]))
4833 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "short", 5) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[5]))
4834 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "char", 4) == 0 && vim_iswhite(s[4])))
4835 	    p = s;
4836     }
4837     for (len = 0; vim_isIDc(p[len]); ++len)
4838 	;
4839     if (len == 0 || !vim_iswhite(p[len]) || cin_nocode(p))
4840 	return 0;
4841 
4842     p = skipwhite(p + len);
4843     fp.lnum = curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
4844     fp.col = (colnr_T)(p - line);
4845     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4846     return (int)col;
4847 }
4848 
4849 /*
4850  * Return the indent of the first non-blank after an equal sign.
4851  *       char *foo = "here";
4852  * Return zero if no (useful) equal sign found.
4853  * Return -1 if the line above "lnum" ends in a backslash.
4854  *      foo = "asdf\
4855  *	       asdf\
4856  *	       here";
4857  */
4858     static int
4859 cin_get_equal_amount(lnum)
4860     linenr_T	lnum;
4861 {
4862     char_u	*line;
4863     char_u	*s;
4864     colnr_T	col;
4865     pos_T	fp;
4866 
4867     if (lnum > 1)
4868     {
4869 	line = ml_get(lnum - 1);
4870 	if (*line != NUL && line[STRLEN(line) - 1] == '\\')
4871 	    return -1;
4872     }
4873 
4874     line = s = ml_get(lnum);
4875     while (*s != NUL && vim_strchr((char_u *)"=;{}\"'", *s) == NULL)
4876     {
4877 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
4878 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4879 	else
4880 	    ++s;
4881     }
4882     if (*s != '=')
4883 	return 0;
4884 
4885     s = skipwhite(s + 1);
4886     if (cin_nocode(s))
4887 	return 0;
4888 
4889     if (*s == '"')	/* nice alignment for continued strings */
4890 	++s;
4891 
4892     fp.lnum = lnum;
4893     fp.col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
4894     getvcol(curwin, &fp, &col, NULL, NULL);
4895     return (int)col;
4896 }
4897 
4898 /*
4899  * Recognize a preprocessor statement: Any line that starts with '#'.
4900  */
4901     static int
4902 cin_ispreproc(s)
4903     char_u *s;
4904 {
4905     s = skipwhite(s);
4906     if (*s == '#')
4907 	return TRUE;
4908     return FALSE;
4909 }
4910 
4911 /*
4912  * Return TRUE if line "*pp" at "*lnump" is a preprocessor statement or a
4913  * continuation line of a preprocessor statement.  Decrease "*lnump" to the
4914  * start and return the line in "*pp".
4915  */
4916     static int
4917 cin_ispreproc_cont(pp, lnump)
4918     char_u	**pp;
4919     linenr_T	*lnump;
4920 {
4921     char_u	*line = *pp;
4922     linenr_T	lnum = *lnump;
4923     int		retval = FALSE;
4924 
4925     while (1)
4926     {
4927 	if (cin_ispreproc(line))
4928 	{
4929 	    retval = TRUE;
4930 	    *lnump = lnum;
4931 	    break;
4932 	}
4933 	if (lnum == 1)
4934 	    break;
4935 	line = ml_get(--lnum);
4936 	if (*line == NUL || line[STRLEN(line) - 1] != '\\')
4937 	    break;
4938     }
4939 
4940     if (lnum != *lnump)
4941 	*pp = ml_get(*lnump);
4942     return retval;
4943 }
4944 
4945 /*
4946  * Recognize the start of a C or C++ comment.
4947  */
4948     static int
4949 cin_iscomment(p)
4950     char_u  *p;
4951 {
4952     return (p[0] == '/' && (p[1] == '*' || p[1] == '/'));
4953 }
4954 
4955 /*
4956  * Recognize the start of a "//" comment.
4957  */
4958     static int
4959 cin_islinecomment(p)
4960     char_u *p;
4961 {
4962     return (p[0] == '/' && p[1] == '/');
4963 }
4964 
4965 /*
4966  * Recognize a line that starts with '{' or '}', or ends with ';', '{' or '}'.
4967  * Don't consider "} else" a terminated line.
4968  * Return the character terminating the line (ending char's have precedence if
4969  * both apply in order to determine initializations).
4970  */
4971     static int
4972 cin_isterminated(s, incl_open, incl_comma)
4973     char_u	*s;
4974     int		incl_open;	/* include '{' at the end as terminator */
4975     int		incl_comma;	/* recognize a trailing comma */
4976 {
4977     char_u found_start = 0;
4978 
4979     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
4980 
4981     if (*s == '{' || (*s == '}' && !cin_iselse(s)))
4982 	found_start = *s;
4983 
4984     while (*s)
4985     {
4986 	/* skip over comments, "" strings and 'c'haracters */
4987 	s = skip_string(cin_skipcomment(s));
4988 	if ((*s == ';' || (incl_open && *s == '{') || *s == '}'
4989 						 || (incl_comma && *s == ','))
4990 		&& cin_nocode(s + 1))
4991 	    return *s;
4992 
4993 	if (*s)
4994 	    s++;
4995     }
4996     return found_start;
4997 }
4998 
4999 /*
5000  * Recognize the basic picture of a function declaration -- it needs to
5001  * have an open paren somewhere and a close paren at the end of the line and
5002  * no semicolons anywhere.
5003  * When a line ends in a comma we continue looking in the next line.
5004  * "sp" points to a string with the line.  When looking at other lines it must
5005  * be restored to the line.  When it's NULL fetch lines here.
5006  * "lnum" is where we start looking.
5007  */
5008     static int
5009 cin_isfuncdecl(sp, first_lnum)
5010     char_u	**sp;
5011     linenr_T	first_lnum;
5012 {
5013     char_u	*s;
5014     linenr_T	lnum = first_lnum;
5015     int		retval = FALSE;
5016 
5017     if (sp == NULL)
5018 	s = ml_get(lnum);
5019     else
5020 	s = *sp;
5021 
5022     while (*s && *s != '(' && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5023     {
5024 	if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5025 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5026 	else
5027 	    ++s;
5028     }
5029     if (*s != '(')
5030 	return FALSE;		/* ';', ' or "  before any () or no '(' */
5031 
5032     while (*s && *s != ';' && *s != '\'' && *s != '"')
5033     {
5034 	if (*s == ')' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5035 	{
5036 	    /* ')' at the end: may have found a match
5037 	     * Check for he previous line not to end in a backslash:
5038 	     *       #if defined(x) && \
5039 	     *		 defined(y)
5040 	     */
5041 	    lnum = first_lnum - 1;
5042 	    s = ml_get(lnum);
5043 	    if (*s == NUL || s[STRLEN(s) - 1] != '\\')
5044 		retval = TRUE;
5045 	    goto done;
5046 	}
5047 	if (*s == ',' && cin_nocode(s + 1))
5048 	{
5049 	    /* ',' at the end: continue looking in the next line */
5050 	    if (lnum >= curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count)
5051 		break;
5052 
5053 	    s = ml_get(++lnum);
5054 	}
5055 	else if (cin_iscomment(s))	/* ignore comments */
5056 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5057 	else
5058 	    ++s;
5059     }
5060 
5061 done:
5062     if (lnum != first_lnum && sp != NULL)
5063 	*sp = ml_get(first_lnum);
5064 
5065     return retval;
5066 }
5067 
5068     static int
5069 cin_isif(p)
5070     char_u  *p;
5071 {
5072     return (STRNCMP(p, "if", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5073 }
5074 
5075     static int
5076 cin_iselse(p)
5077     char_u  *p;
5078 {
5079     if (*p == '}')	    /* accept "} else" */
5080 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5081     return (STRNCMP(p, "else", 4) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[4]));
5082 }
5083 
5084     static int
5085 cin_isdo(p)
5086     char_u  *p;
5087 {
5088     return (STRNCMP(p, "do", 2) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[2]));
5089 }
5090 
5091 /*
5092  * Check if this is a "while" that should have a matching "do".
5093  * We only accept a "while (condition) ;", with only white space between the
5094  * ')' and ';'. The condition may be spread over several lines.
5095  */
5096     static int
5097 cin_iswhileofdo(p, lnum, ind_maxparen)	    /* XXX */
5098     char_u	*p;
5099     linenr_T	lnum;
5100     int		ind_maxparen;
5101 {
5102     pos_T	cursor_save;
5103     pos_T	*trypos;
5104     int		retval = FALSE;
5105 
5106     p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5107     if (*p == '}')		/* accept "} while (cond);" */
5108 	p = cin_skipcomment(p + 1);
5109     if (STRNCMP(p, "while", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]))
5110     {
5111 	cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5112 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5113 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5114 	p = ml_get_curline();
5115 	while (*p && *p != 'w')	/* skip any '}', until the 'w' of the "while" */
5116 	{
5117 	    ++p;
5118 	    ++curwin->w_cursor.col;
5119 	}
5120 	if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, 0, 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL
5121 		&& *cin_skipcomment(ml_get_pos(trypos) + 1) == ';')
5122 	    retval = TRUE;
5123 	curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5124     }
5125     return retval;
5126 }
5127 
5128     static int
5129 cin_isbreak(p)
5130     char_u  *p;
5131 {
5132     return (STRNCMP(p, "break", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(p[5]));
5133 }
5134 
5135 /* Find the position of a C++ base-class declaration or
5136  * constructor-initialization. eg:
5137  *
5138  * class MyClass :
5139  *	baseClass		<-- here
5140  * class MyClass : public baseClass,
5141  *	anotherBaseClass	<-- here (should probably lineup ??)
5142  * MyClass::MyClass(...) :
5143  *	baseClass(...)		<-- here (constructor-initialization)
5144  */
5145     static int
5146 cin_is_cpp_baseclass(line, col)
5147     char_u	*line;
5148     colnr_T	*col;
5149 {
5150     char_u	*s;
5151     int		class_or_struct, lookfor_ctor_init, cpp_base_class;
5152 
5153     *col = 0;
5154 
5155     s = skipwhite(line);
5156     if (*s == '#')		/* skip #define FOO x ? (x) : x */
5157 	return FALSE;
5158     s = cin_skipcomment(s);
5159     if (*s == NUL)
5160 	return FALSE;
5161 
5162     cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5163 
5164     while(*s != NUL)
5165     {
5166 	if (s[0] == ':')
5167 	{
5168 	    if (s[1] == ':')
5169 	    {
5170 		/* skip double colon. It can't be a constructor
5171 		 * initialization any more */
5172 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5173 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 2);
5174 	    }
5175 	    else if (lookfor_ctor_init || class_or_struct)
5176 	    {
5177 		/* we have something found, that looks like the start of
5178 		 * cpp-base-class-declaration or contructor-initialization */
5179 		cpp_base_class = TRUE;
5180 		lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5181 		*col = 0;
5182 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5183 	    }
5184 	    else
5185 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5186 	}
5187 	else if ((STRNCMP(s, "class", 5) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[5]))
5188 		|| (STRNCMP(s, "struct", 6) == 0 && !vim_isIDc(s[6])))
5189 	{
5190 	    class_or_struct = TRUE;
5191 	    lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5192 
5193 	    if (*s == 'c')
5194 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 5);
5195 	    else
5196 		s = cin_skipcomment(s + 6);
5197 	}
5198 	else
5199 	{
5200 	    if (s[0] == '{' || s[0] == '}' || s[0] == ';')
5201 	    {
5202 		cpp_base_class = lookfor_ctor_init = class_or_struct = FALSE;
5203 	    }
5204 	    else if (s[0] == ')')
5205 	    {
5206 		/* Constructor-initialization is assumed if we come across
5207 		 * something like "):" */
5208 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5209 		lookfor_ctor_init = TRUE;
5210 	    }
5211 	    else if (!vim_isIDc(s[0]))
5212 	    {
5213 		/* if it is not an identifier, we are wrong */
5214 		class_or_struct = FALSE;
5215 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5216 	    }
5217 	    else if (*col == 0)
5218 	    {
5219 		/* it can't be a constructor-initialization any more */
5220 		lookfor_ctor_init = FALSE;
5221 
5222 		/* the first statement starts here: lineup with this one... */
5223 		if (cpp_base_class && *col == 0)
5224 		    *col = (colnr_T)(s - line);
5225 	    }
5226 
5227 	    s = cin_skipcomment(s + 1);
5228 	}
5229     }
5230 
5231     return cpp_base_class;
5232 }
5233 
5234 /*
5235  * Return TRUE if string "s" ends with the string "find", possibly followed by
5236  * white space and comments.  Skip strings and comments.
5237  * Ignore "ignore" after "find" if it's not NULL.
5238  */
5239     static int
5240 cin_ends_in(s, find, ignore)
5241     char_u	*s;
5242     char_u	*find;
5243     char_u	*ignore;
5244 {
5245     char_u	*p = s;
5246     char_u	*r;
5247     int		len = (int)STRLEN(find);
5248 
5249     while (*p != NUL)
5250     {
5251 	p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5252 	if (STRNCMP(p, find, len) == 0)
5253 	{
5254 	    r = skipwhite(p + len);
5255 	    if (ignore != NULL && STRNCMP(r, ignore, STRLEN(ignore)) == 0)
5256 		r = skipwhite(r + STRLEN(ignore));
5257 	    if (cin_nocode(r))
5258 		return TRUE;
5259 	}
5260 	if (*p != NUL)
5261 	    ++p;
5262     }
5263     return FALSE;
5264 }
5265 
5266 /*
5267  * Skip strings, chars and comments until at or past "trypos".
5268  * Return the column found.
5269  */
5270     static int
5271 cin_skip2pos(trypos)
5272     pos_T	*trypos;
5273 {
5274     char_u	*line;
5275     char_u	*p;
5276 
5277     p = line = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5278     while (*p && (colnr_T)(p - line) < trypos->col)
5279     {
5280 	if (cin_iscomment(p))
5281 	    p = cin_skipcomment(p);
5282 	else
5283 	{
5284 	    p = skip_string(p);
5285 	    ++p;
5286 	}
5287     }
5288     return (int)(p - line);
5289 }
5290 
5291 /*
5292  * Find the '{' at the start of the block we are in.
5293  * Return NULL if no match found.
5294  * Ignore a '{' that is in a comment, makes indenting the next three lines
5295  * work. */
5296 /* foo()    */
5297 /* {	    */
5298 /* }	    */
5299 
5300     static pos_T *
5301 find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5302     int		ind_maxcomment;
5303 {
5304     pos_T	cursor_save;
5305     pos_T	*trypos;
5306     pos_T	*pos;
5307     static pos_T	pos_copy;
5308 
5309     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5310     while ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '{', FM_BLOCKSTOP, 0)) != NULL)
5311     {
5312 	pos_copy = *trypos;	/* copy pos_T, next findmatch will change it */
5313 	trypos = &pos_copy;
5314 	curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5315 	pos = NULL;
5316 	/* ignore the { if it's in a // comment */
5317 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) == trypos->col
5318 		&& (pos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) == NULL) /* XXX */
5319 	    break;
5320 	if (pos != NULL)
5321 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
5322     }
5323     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5324     return trypos;
5325 }
5326 
5327 /*
5328  * Find the matching '(', failing if it is in a comment.
5329  * Return NULL of no match found.
5330  */
5331     static pos_T *
5332 find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)	    /* XXX */
5333     int		ind_maxparen;
5334     int		ind_maxcomment;
5335 {
5336     pos_T	cursor_save;
5337     pos_T	*trypos;
5338     static pos_T	pos_copy;
5339 
5340     cursor_save = curwin->w_cursor;
5341     if ((trypos = findmatchlimit(NULL, '(', 0, ind_maxparen)) != NULL)
5342     {
5343 	/* check if the ( is in a // comment */
5344 	if ((colnr_T)cin_skip2pos(trypos) > trypos->col)
5345 	    trypos = NULL;
5346 	else
5347 	{
5348 	    pos_copy = *trypos;	    /* copy trypos, findmatch will change it */
5349 	    trypos = &pos_copy;
5350 	    curwin->w_cursor = *trypos;
5351 	    if (find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment) != NULL) /* XXX */
5352 		trypos = NULL;
5353 	}
5354     }
5355     curwin->w_cursor = cursor_save;
5356     return trypos;
5357 }
5358 
5359 /*
5360  * Return ind_maxparen corrected for the difference in line number between the
5361  * cursor position and "startpos".  This makes sure that searching for a
5362  * matching paren above the cursor line doesn't find a match because of
5363  * looking a few lines further.
5364  */
5365     static int
5366 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, startpos)
5367     int		ind_maxparen;
5368     pos_T	*startpos;
5369 {
5370     long	n = (long)startpos->lnum - (long)curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
5371 
5372     if (n > 0 && n < ind_maxparen / 2)
5373 	return ind_maxparen - (int)n;
5374     return ind_maxparen;
5375 }
5376 
5377 /*
5378  * Set w_cursor.col to the column number of the last unmatched ')' or '{' in
5379  * line "l".
5380  */
5381     static int
5382 find_last_paren(l, start, end)
5383     char_u	*l;
5384     int		start, end;
5385 {
5386     int		i;
5387     int		retval = FALSE;
5388     int		open_count = 0;
5389 
5390     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;		    /* default is start of line */
5391 
5392     for (i = 0; l[i]; i++)
5393     {
5394 	i = (int)(cin_skipcomment(l + i) - l); /* ignore parens in comments */
5395 	i = (int)(skip_string(l + i) - l);    /* ignore parens in quotes */
5396 	if (l[i] == start)
5397 	    ++open_count;
5398 	else if (l[i] == end)
5399 	{
5400 	    if (open_count > 0)
5401 		--open_count;
5402 	    else
5403 	    {
5404 		curwin->w_cursor.col = i;
5405 		retval = TRUE;
5406 	    }
5407 	}
5408     }
5409     return retval;
5410 }
5411 
5412     int
5413 get_c_indent()
5414 {
5415     /*
5416      * spaces from a block's opening brace the prevailing indent for that
5417      * block should be
5418      */
5419     int ind_level = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5420 
5421     /*
5422      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace that's at the end of a
5423      * line is imagined to be.
5424      */
5425     int ind_open_imag = 0;
5426 
5427     /*
5428      * spaces from the prevailing indent for a line that is not precededof by
5429      * an opening brace.
5430      */
5431     int ind_no_brace = 0;
5432 
5433     /*
5434      * column where the first { of a function should be located }
5435      */
5436     int ind_first_open = 0;
5437 
5438     /*
5439      * spaces from the prevailing indent a leftmost open brace should be
5440      * located
5441      */
5442     int ind_open_extra = 0;
5443 
5444     /*
5445      * spaces from the matching open brace (real location for one at the left
5446      * edge; imaginary location from one that ends a line) the matching close
5447      * brace should be located
5448      */
5449     int ind_close_extra = 0;
5450 
5451     /*
5452      * spaces from the edge of the line an open brace sitting in the leftmost
5453      * column is imagined to be
5454      */
5455     int ind_open_left_imag = 0;
5456 
5457     /*
5458      * spaces from the switch() indent a "case xx" label should be located
5459      */
5460     int ind_case = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5461 
5462     /*
5463      * spaces from the "case xx:" code after a switch() should be located
5464      */
5465     int ind_case_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5466 
5467     /*
5468      * lineup break at end of case in switch() with case label
5469      */
5470     int ind_case_break = 0;
5471 
5472     /*
5473      * spaces from the class declaration indent a scope declaration label
5474      * should be located
5475      */
5476     int ind_scopedecl = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5477 
5478     /*
5479      * spaces from the scope declaration label code should be located
5480      */
5481     int ind_scopedecl_code = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5482 
5483     /*
5484      * amount K&R-style parameters should be indented
5485      */
5486     int ind_param = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5487 
5488     /*
5489      * amount a function type spec should be indented
5490      */
5491     int ind_func_type = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5492 
5493     /*
5494      * amount a cpp base class declaration or constructor initialization
5495      * should be indented
5496      */
5497     int ind_cpp_baseclass = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5498 
5499     /*
5500      * additional spaces beyond the prevailing indent a continuation line
5501      * should be located
5502      */
5503     int ind_continuation = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5504 
5505     /*
5506      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses
5507      */
5508     int ind_unclosed = curbuf->b_p_sw * 2;
5509 
5510     /*
5511      * spaces from the indent of the line with an unclosed parentheses, which
5512      * itself is also unclosed
5513      */
5514     int ind_unclosed2 = curbuf->b_p_sw;
5515 
5516     /*
5517      * suppress ignoring spaces from the indent of a line starting with an
5518      * unclosed parentheses.
5519      */
5520     int ind_unclosed_noignore = 0;
5521 
5522     /*
5523      * If the opening paren is the last nonwhite character on the line, and
5524      * ind_unclosed_wrapped is nonzero, use this indent relative to the outer
5525      * context (for very long lines).
5526      */
5527     int ind_unclosed_wrapped = 0;
5528 
5529     /*
5530      * suppress ignoring white space when lining up with the character after
5531      * an unclosed parentheses.
5532      */
5533     int ind_unclosed_whiteok = 0;
5534 
5535     /*
5536      * indent a closing parentheses under the line start of the matching
5537      * opening parentheses.
5538      */
5539     int ind_matching_paren = 0;
5540 
5541     /*
5542      * Extra indent for comments.
5543      */
5544     int ind_comment = 0;
5545 
5546     /*
5547      * spaces from the comment opener when there is nothing after it.
5548      */
5549     int ind_in_comment = 3;
5550 
5551     /*
5552      * boolean: if non-zero, use ind_in_comment even if there is something
5553      * after the comment opener.
5554      */
5555     int ind_in_comment2 = 0;
5556 
5557     /*
5558      * max lines to search for an open paren
5559      */
5560     int ind_maxparen = 20;
5561 
5562     /*
5563      * max lines to search for an open comment
5564      */
5565     int ind_maxcomment = 70;
5566 
5567     /*
5568      * handle braces for java code
5569      */
5570     int	ind_java = 0;
5571 
5572     /*
5573      * handle blocked cases correctly
5574      */
5575     int ind_keep_case_label = 0;
5576 
5577     pos_T	cur_curpos;
5578     int		amount;
5579     int		scope_amount;
5580     int		cur_amount;
5581     colnr_T	col;
5582     char_u	*theline;
5583     char_u	*linecopy;
5584     pos_T	*trypos;
5585     pos_T	*tryposBrace = NULL;
5586     pos_T	our_paren_pos;
5587     char_u	*start;
5588     int		start_brace;
5589 #define BRACE_IN_COL0		1	    /* '{' is in comumn 0 */
5590 #define BRACE_AT_START		2	    /* '{' is at start of line */
5591 #define BRACE_AT_END		3	    /* '{' is at end of line */
5592     linenr_T	ourscope;
5593     char_u	*l;
5594     char_u	*look;
5595     char_u	terminated;
5596     int		lookfor;
5597 #define LOOKFOR_INITIAL		0
5598 #define LOOKFOR_IF		1
5599 #define LOOKFOR_DO		2
5600 #define LOOKFOR_CASE		3
5601 #define LOOKFOR_ANY		4
5602 #define LOOKFOR_TERM		5
5603 #define LOOKFOR_UNTERM		6
5604 #define LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL	7
5605 #define LOOKFOR_NOBREAK		8
5606 #define LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS	9
5607 #define LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT	10
5608 
5609     int		whilelevel;
5610     linenr_T	lnum;
5611     char_u	*options;
5612     int		fraction = 0;	    /* init for GCC */
5613     int		divider;
5614     int		n;
5615     int		iscase;
5616     int		lookfor_break;
5617     int		cont_amount = 0;    /* amount for continuation line */
5618 
5619     for (options = curbuf->b_p_cino; *options; )
5620     {
5621 	l = options++;
5622 	if (*options == '-')
5623 	    ++options;
5624 	n = getdigits(&options);
5625 	divider = 0;
5626 	if (*options == '.')	    /* ".5s" means a fraction */
5627 	{
5628 	    fraction = atol((char *)++options);
5629 	    while (VIM_ISDIGIT(*options))
5630 	    {
5631 		++options;
5632 		if (divider)
5633 		    divider *= 10;
5634 		else
5635 		    divider = 10;
5636 	    }
5637 	}
5638 	if (*options == 's')	    /* "2s" means two times 'shiftwidth' */
5639 	{
5640 	    if (n == 0 && fraction == 0)
5641 		n = curbuf->b_p_sw;	/* just "s" is one 'shiftwidth' */
5642 	    else
5643 	    {
5644 		n *= curbuf->b_p_sw;
5645 		if (divider)
5646 		    n += (curbuf->b_p_sw * fraction + divider / 2) / divider;
5647 	    }
5648 	    ++options;
5649 	}
5650 	if (l[1] == '-')
5651 	    n = -n;
5652 	/* When adding an entry here, also update the default 'cinoptions' in
5653 	 * change.txt, and add explanation for it! */
5654 	switch (*l)
5655 	{
5656 	    case '>': ind_level = n; break;
5657 	    case 'e': ind_open_imag = n; break;
5658 	    case 'n': ind_no_brace = n; break;
5659 	    case 'f': ind_first_open = n; break;
5660 	    case '{': ind_open_extra = n; break;
5661 	    case '}': ind_close_extra = n; break;
5662 	    case '^': ind_open_left_imag = n; break;
5663 	    case ':': ind_case = n; break;
5664 	    case '=': ind_case_code = n; break;
5665 	    case 'b': ind_case_break = n; break;
5666 	    case 'p': ind_param = n; break;
5667 	    case 't': ind_func_type = n; break;
5668 	    case '/': ind_comment = n; break;
5669 	    case 'c': ind_in_comment = n; break;
5670 	    case 'C': ind_in_comment2 = n; break;
5671 	    case 'i': ind_cpp_baseclass = n; break;
5672 	    case '+': ind_continuation = n; break;
5673 	    case '(': ind_unclosed = n; break;
5674 	    case 'u': ind_unclosed2 = n; break;
5675 	    case 'U': ind_unclosed_noignore = n; break;
5676 	    case 'W': ind_unclosed_wrapped = n; break;
5677 	    case 'w': ind_unclosed_whiteok = n; break;
5678 	    case 'm': ind_matching_paren = n; break;
5679 	    case ')': ind_maxparen = n; break;
5680 	    case '*': ind_maxcomment = n; break;
5681 	    case 'g': ind_scopedecl = n; break;
5682 	    case 'h': ind_scopedecl_code = n; break;
5683 	    case 'j': ind_java = n; break;
5684 	    case 'l': ind_keep_case_label = n; break;
5685 	}
5686     }
5687 
5688     /* remember where the cursor was when we started */
5689     cur_curpos = curwin->w_cursor;
5690 
5691     /* Get a copy of the current contents of the line.
5692      * This is required, because only the most recent line obtained with
5693      * ml_get is valid! */
5694     linecopy = vim_strsave(ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum));
5695     if (linecopy == NULL)
5696 	return 0;
5697 
5698     /*
5699      * In insert mode and the cursor is on a ')' truncate the line at the
5700      * cursor position.  We don't want to line up with the matching '(' when
5701      * inserting new stuff.
5702      * For unknown reasons the cursor might be past the end of the line, thus
5703      * check for that.
5704      */
5705     if ((State & INSERT)
5706 	    && curwin->w_cursor.col < STRLEN(linecopy)
5707 	    && linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] == ')')
5708 	linecopy[curwin->w_cursor.col] = NUL;
5709 
5710     theline = skipwhite(linecopy);
5711 
5712     /* move the cursor to the start of the line */
5713 
5714     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
5715 
5716     /*
5717      * #defines and so on always go at the left when included in 'cinkeys'.
5718      */
5719     if (*theline == '#' && (*linecopy == '#' || in_cinkeys('#', ' ', TRUE)))
5720     {
5721 	amount = 0;
5722     }
5723 
5724     /*
5725      * Is it a non-case label?	Then that goes at the left margin too.
5726      */
5727     else if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))	    /* XXX */
5728     {
5729 	amount = 0;
5730     }
5731 
5732     /*
5733      * If we're inside a "//" comment and there is a "//" comment in a
5734      * previous line, lineup with that one.
5735      */
5736     else if (cin_islinecomment(theline)
5737 	    && (trypos = find_line_comment()) != NULL) /* XXX */
5738     {
5739 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5740 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5741 	amount = col;
5742     }
5743 
5744     /*
5745      * If we're inside a comment and not looking at the start of the
5746      * comment, try using the 'comments' option.
5747      */
5748     else if (!cin_iscomment(theline)
5749 	    && (trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL) /* XXX */
5750     {
5751 	int	lead_start_len = 2;
5752 	int	lead_middle_len = 1;
5753 	char_u	lead_start[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* start-comment string */
5754 	char_u	lead_middle[COM_MAX_LEN];	/* middle-comment string */
5755 	char_u	lead_end[COM_MAX_LEN];		/* end-comment string */
5756 	char_u	*p;
5757 	int	start_align = 0;
5758 	int	start_off = 0;
5759 	int	done = FALSE;
5760 
5761 	/* find how indented the line beginning the comment is */
5762 	getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5763 	amount = col;
5764 
5765 	p = curbuf->b_p_com;
5766 	while (*p != NUL)
5767 	{
5768 	    int	align = 0;
5769 	    int	off = 0;
5770 	    int what = 0;
5771 
5772 	    while (*p != NUL && *p != ':')
5773 	    {
5774 		if (*p == COM_START || *p == COM_END || *p == COM_MIDDLE)
5775 		    what = *p++;
5776 		else if (*p == COM_LEFT || *p == COM_RIGHT)
5777 		    align = *p++;
5778 		else if (VIM_ISDIGIT(*p) || *p == '-')
5779 		    off = getdigits(&p);
5780 		else
5781 		    ++p;
5782 	    }
5783 
5784 	    if (*p == ':')
5785 		++p;
5786 	    (void)copy_option_part(&p, lead_end, COM_MAX_LEN, ",");
5787 	    if (what == COM_START)
5788 	    {
5789 		STRCPY(lead_start, lead_end);
5790 		lead_start_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_start);
5791 		start_off = off;
5792 		start_align = align;
5793 	    }
5794 	    else if (what == COM_MIDDLE)
5795 	    {
5796 		STRCPY(lead_middle, lead_end);
5797 		lead_middle_len = (int)STRLEN(lead_middle);
5798 	    }
5799 	    else if (what == COM_END)
5800 	    {
5801 		/* If our line starts with the middle comment string, line it
5802 		 * up with the comment opener per the 'comments' option. */
5803 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) == 0
5804 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) != 0)
5805 		{
5806 		    done = TRUE;
5807 		    if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
5808 		    {
5809 			/* If the start comment string matches in the previous
5810 			 * line, use the indent of that line pluss offset.  If
5811 			 * the middle comment string matches in the previous
5812 			 * line, use the indent of that line.  XXX */
5813 			look = skipwhite(ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1));
5814 			if (STRNCMP(look, lead_start, lead_start_len) == 0)
5815 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
5816 			else if (STRNCMP(look, lead_middle,
5817 							lead_middle_len) == 0)
5818 			{
5819 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
5820 			    break;
5821 			}
5822 			/* If the start comment string doesn't match with the
5823 			 * start of the comment, skip this entry. XXX */
5824 			else if (STRNCMP(ml_get(trypos->lnum) + trypos->col,
5825 					     lead_start, lead_start_len) != 0)
5826 			    continue;
5827 		    }
5828 		    if (start_off != 0)
5829 			amount += start_off;
5830 		    else if (start_align == COM_RIGHT)
5831 			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
5832 						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
5833 		    break;
5834 		}
5835 
5836 		/* If our line starts with the end comment string, line it up
5837 		 * with the middle comment */
5838 		if (STRNCMP(theline, lead_middle, lead_middle_len) != 0
5839 			&& STRNCMP(theline, lead_end, STRLEN(lead_end)) == 0)
5840 		{
5841 		    amount = get_indent_lnum(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
5842 								     /* XXX */
5843 		    if (off != 0)
5844 			amount += off;
5845 		    else if (align == COM_RIGHT)
5846 			amount += vim_strsize(lead_start)
5847 						   - vim_strsize(lead_middle);
5848 		    done = TRUE;
5849 		    break;
5850 		}
5851 	    }
5852 	}
5853 
5854 	/* If our line starts with an asterisk, line up with the
5855 	 * asterisk in the comment opener; otherwise, line up
5856 	 * with the first character of the comment text.
5857 	 */
5858 	if (done)
5859 	    ;
5860 	else if (theline[0] == '*')
5861 	    amount += 1;
5862 	else
5863 	{
5864 	    /*
5865 	     * If we are more than one line away from the comment opener, take
5866 	     * the indent of the previous non-empty line.  If 'cino' has "CO"
5867 	     * and we are just below the comment opener and there are any
5868 	     * white characters after it line up with the text after it;
5869 	     * otherwise, add the amount specified by "c" in 'cino'
5870 	     */
5871 	    amount = -1;
5872 	    for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > trypos->lnum; --lnum)
5873 	    {
5874 		if (linewhite(lnum))		    /* skip blank lines */
5875 		    continue;
5876 		amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	    /* XXX */
5877 		break;
5878 	    }
5879 	    if (amount == -1)			    /* use the comment opener */
5880 	    {
5881 		if (!ind_in_comment2)
5882 		{
5883 		    start = ml_get(trypos->lnum);
5884 		    look = start + trypos->col + 2; /* skip / and * */
5885 		    if (*look != NUL)		    /* if something after it */
5886 			trypos->col = (colnr_T)(skipwhite(look) - start);
5887 		}
5888 		getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
5889 		amount = col;
5890 		if (ind_in_comment2 || *look == NUL)
5891 		    amount += ind_in_comment;
5892 	    }
5893 	}
5894     }
5895 
5896     /*
5897      * Are we inside parentheses or braces?
5898      */						    /* XXX */
5899     else if (((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
5900 		&& ind_java == 0)
5901 	    || (tryposBrace = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
5902 	    || trypos != NULL)
5903     {
5904       if (trypos != NULL && tryposBrace != NULL)
5905       {
5906 	  /* Both an unmatched '(' and '{' is found.  Use the one which is
5907 	   * closer to the current cursor position, set the other to NULL. */
5908 	  if (trypos->lnum != tryposBrace->lnum
5909 		  ? trypos->lnum < tryposBrace->lnum
5910 		  : trypos->col < tryposBrace->col)
5911 	      trypos = NULL;
5912 	  else
5913 	      tryposBrace = NULL;
5914       }
5915 
5916       if (trypos != NULL)
5917       {
5918 	/*
5919 	 * If the matching paren is more than one line away, use the indent of
5920 	 * a previous non-empty line that matches the same paren.
5921 	 */
5922 	amount = -1;
5923 	cur_amount = MAXCOL;
5924 	our_paren_pos = *trypos;
5925 	for (lnum = cur_curpos.lnum - 1; lnum > our_paren_pos.lnum; --lnum)
5926 	{
5927 	    l = skipwhite(ml_get(lnum));
5928 	    if (cin_nocode(l))		/* skip comment lines */
5929 		continue;
5930 	    if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &lnum))	/* ignore #defines, #if, etc. */
5931 		continue;
5932 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = lnum;
5933 
5934 	    /* Skip a comment. XXX */
5935 	    if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
5936 	    {
5937 		lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
5938 		continue;
5939 	    }
5940 
5941 	    /* XXX */
5942 	    if ((trypos = find_match_paren(
5943 			    corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
5944 						      ind_maxcomment)) != NULL
5945 		    && trypos->lnum == our_paren_pos.lnum
5946 		    && trypos->col == our_paren_pos.col)
5947 	    {
5948 		    amount = get_indent_lnum(lnum);	/* XXX */
5949 
5950 		    if (theline[0] == ')')
5951 		    {
5952 			if (our_paren_pos.lnum != lnum && cur_amount > amount)
5953 			    cur_amount = amount;
5954 			amount = -1;
5955 		    }
5956 		break;
5957 	    }
5958 	}
5959 
5960 	/*
5961 	 * Line up with line where the matching paren is. XXX
5962 	 * If the line starts with a '(' or the indent for unclosed
5963 	 * parentheses is zero, line up with the unclosed parentheses.
5964 	 */
5965 	if (amount == -1)
5966 	{
5967 	    amount = skip_label(our_paren_pos.lnum, &look, ind_maxcomment);
5968 	    if (theline[0] == ')' || ind_unclosed == 0
5969 		       || (!ind_unclosed_noignore && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
5970 	    {
5971 		/*
5972 		 * If we're looking at a close paren, line up right there;
5973 		 * otherwise, line up with the next (non-white) character.
5974 		 * When ind_unclosed_wrapped is set and the matching paren is
5975 		 * the last nonwhite character of the line, use either the
5976 		 * indent of the current line or the indentation of the next
5977 		 * outer paren and add ind_unclosed_wrapped (for very long
5978 		 * lines).
5979 		 */
5980 		if (theline[0] != ')')
5981 		{
5982 		    cur_amount = MAXCOL;
5983 		    l = ml_get(our_paren_pos.lnum);
5984 		    if (ind_unclosed_wrapped
5985 				       && cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"(", NULL))
5986 		    {
5987 			/* look for opening unmatched paren, indent one level
5988 			 * for each additional level */
5989 			n = 1;
5990 			for (col = 0; col < our_paren_pos.col; ++col)
5991 			{
5992 			    switch (l[col])
5993 			    {
5994 				case '(':
5995 				case '{': ++n;
5996 					  break;
5997 
5998 				case ')':
5999 				case '}': if (n > 1)
6000 					      --n;
6001 					  break;
6002 			    }
6003 			}
6004 
6005 			our_paren_pos.col = 0;
6006 			amount += n * ind_unclosed_wrapped;
6007 		    }
6008 		    else if (ind_unclosed_whiteok)
6009 			our_paren_pos.col++;
6010 		    else
6011 		    {
6012 			col = our_paren_pos.col + 1;
6013 			while (vim_iswhite(l[col]))
6014 			    col++;
6015 			if (l[col] != NUL)	/* In case of trailing space */
6016 			    our_paren_pos.col = col;
6017 			else
6018 			    our_paren_pos.col++;
6019 		    }
6020 		}
6021 
6022 		/*
6023 		 * Find how indented the paren is, or the character after it
6024 		 * if we did the above "if".
6025 		 */
6026 		if (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6027 		{
6028 		    getvcol(curwin, &our_paren_pos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6029 		    if (cur_amount > (int)col)
6030 			cur_amount = col;
6031 		}
6032 	    }
6033 
6034 	    if (theline[0] == ')' && ind_matching_paren)
6035 	    {
6036 		/* Line up with the start of the matching paren line. */
6037 	    }
6038 	    else if (ind_unclosed == 0 || (!ind_unclosed_noignore
6039 						  && *skipwhite(look) == '('))
6040 	    {
6041 		if (cur_amount != MAXCOL)
6042 		    amount = cur_amount;
6043 	    }
6044 	    else
6045 	    {
6046 		/* add ind_unclosed2 for each '(' before our matching one */
6047 		col = our_paren_pos.col;
6048 		while (our_paren_pos.col > 0)
6049 		{
6050 		    --our_paren_pos.col;
6051 		    switch (*ml_get_pos(&our_paren_pos))
6052 		    {
6053 			case '(': amount += ind_unclosed2;
6054 				  col = our_paren_pos.col;
6055 				  break;
6056 			case ')': amount -= ind_unclosed2;
6057 				  col = MAXCOL;
6058 				  break;
6059 		    }
6060 		}
6061 
6062 		/* Use ind_unclosed once, when the first '(' is not inside
6063 		 * braces */
6064 		if (col == MAXCOL)
6065 		    amount += ind_unclosed;
6066 		else
6067 		{
6068 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = our_paren_pos.lnum;
6069 		    curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6070 		    if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6071 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6072 			amount += ind_unclosed2;
6073 		    else
6074 			amount += ind_unclosed;
6075 		}
6076 		/*
6077 		 * For a line starting with ')' use the minimum of the two
6078 		 * positions, to avoid giving it more indent than the previous
6079 		 * lines:
6080 		 *  func_long_name(		    if (x
6081 		 *	arg				    && yy
6082 		 *	)	  ^ not here	       )    ^ not here
6083 		 */
6084 		if (cur_amount < amount)
6085 		    amount = cur_amount;
6086 	    }
6087 	}
6088 
6089 	/* add extra indent for a comment */
6090 	if (cin_iscomment(theline))
6091 	    amount += ind_comment;
6092       }
6093 
6094       /*
6095        * Are we at least inside braces, then?
6096        */
6097       else
6098       {
6099 	trypos = tryposBrace;
6100 
6101 	ourscope = trypos->lnum;
6102 	start = ml_get(ourscope);
6103 
6104 	/*
6105 	 * Now figure out how indented the line is in general.
6106 	 * If the brace was at the start of the line, we use that;
6107 	 * otherwise, check out the indentation of the line as
6108 	 * a whole and then add the "imaginary indent" to that.
6109 	 */
6110 	look = skipwhite(start);
6111 	if (*look == '{')
6112 	{
6113 	    getvcol(curwin, trypos, &col, NULL, NULL);
6114 	    amount = col;
6115 	    if (*start == '{')
6116 		start_brace = BRACE_IN_COL0;
6117 	    else
6118 		start_brace = BRACE_AT_START;
6119 	}
6120 	else
6121 	{
6122 	    /*
6123 	     * that opening brace might have been on a continuation
6124 	     * line.  if so, find the start of the line.
6125 	     */
6126 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = ourscope;
6127 
6128 	    /*
6129 	     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6130 	     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6131 	     */
6132 	    lnum = ourscope;
6133 	    if (find_last_paren(start, '(', ')')
6134 		    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6135 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6136 		lnum = trypos->lnum;
6137 
6138 	    /*
6139 	     * It could have been something like
6140 	     *	   case 1: if (asdf &&
6141 	     *			ldfd) {
6142 	     *		    }
6143 	     */
6144 	    if (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6145 		amount = get_indent();
6146 	    else
6147 		amount = skip_label(lnum, &l, ind_maxcomment);
6148 
6149 	    start_brace = BRACE_AT_END;
6150 	}
6151 
6152 	/*
6153 	 * if we're looking at a closing brace, that's where
6154 	 * we want to be.  otherwise, add the amount of room
6155 	 * that an indent is supposed to be.
6156 	 */
6157 	if (theline[0] == '}')
6158 	{
6159 	    /*
6160 	     * they may want closing braces to line up with something
6161 	     * other than the open brace.  indulge them, if so.
6162 	     */
6163 	    amount += ind_close_extra;
6164 	}
6165 	else
6166 	{
6167 	    /*
6168 	     * If we're looking at an "else", try to find an "if"
6169 	     * to match it with.
6170 	     * If we're looking at a "while", try to find a "do"
6171 	     * to match it with.
6172 	     */
6173 	    lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6174 	    if (cin_iselse(theline))
6175 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_IF;
6176 	    else if (cin_iswhileofdo(theline, cur_curpos.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6177 								    /* XXX */
6178 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_DO;
6179 	    if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_INITIAL)
6180 	    {
6181 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum = cur_curpos.lnum;
6182 		if (find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen,
6183 							ind_maxcomment) == OK)
6184 		{
6185 		    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6186 		    goto theend;
6187 		}
6188 	    }
6189 
6190 	    /*
6191 	     * We get here if we are not on an "while-of-do" or "else" (or
6192 	     * failed to find a matching "if").
6193 	     * Search backwards for something to line up with.
6194 	     * First set amount for when we don't find anything.
6195 	     */
6196 
6197 	    /*
6198 	     * if the '{' is  _really_ at the left margin, use the imaginary
6199 	     * location of a left-margin brace.  Otherwise, correct the
6200 	     * location for ind_open_extra.
6201 	     */
6202 
6203 	    if (start_brace == BRACE_IN_COL0)	    /* '{' is in column 0 */
6204 	    {
6205 		amount = ind_open_left_imag;
6206 	    }
6207 	    else
6208 	    {
6209 		if (start_brace == BRACE_AT_END)    /* '{' is at end of line */
6210 		    amount += ind_open_imag;
6211 		else
6212 		{
6213 		    /* Compensate for adding ind_open_extra later. */
6214 		    amount -= ind_open_extra;
6215 		    if (amount < 0)
6216 			amount = 0;
6217 		}
6218 	    }
6219 
6220 	    lookfor_break = FALSE;
6221 
6222 	    if (cin_iscase(theline))	/* it's a switch() label */
6223 	    {
6224 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_CASE;	/* find a previous switch() label */
6225 		amount += ind_case;
6226 	    }
6227 	    else if (cin_isscopedecl(theline))	/* private:, ... */
6228 	    {
6229 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL;	/* class decl is this block */
6230 		amount += ind_scopedecl;
6231 	    }
6232 	    else
6233 	    {
6234 		if (ind_case_break && cin_isbreak(theline))	/* break; ... */
6235 		    lookfor_break = TRUE;
6236 
6237 		lookfor = LOOKFOR_INITIAL;
6238 		amount += ind_level;	/* ind_level from start of block */
6239 	    }
6240 	    scope_amount = amount;
6241 	    whilelevel = 0;
6242 
6243 	    /*
6244 	     * Search backwards.  If we find something we recognize, line up
6245 	     * with that.
6246 	     *
6247 	     * if we're looking at an open brace, indent
6248 	     * the usual amount relative to the conditional
6249 	     * that opens the block.
6250 	     */
6251 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
6252 	    for (;;)
6253 	    {
6254 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
6255 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
6256 
6257 		/*
6258 		 * If we went all the way back to the start of our scope, line
6259 		 * up with it.
6260 		 */
6261 		if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum <= ourscope)
6262 		{
6263 		    /* we reached end of scope:
6264 		     * if looking for a enum or structure initialization
6265 		     * go further back:
6266 		     * if it is an initializer (enum xxx or xxx =), then
6267 		     * don't add ind_continuation, otherwise it is a variable
6268 		     * declaration:
6269 		     * int x,
6270 		     *     here; <-- add ind_continuation
6271 		     */
6272 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6273 		    {
6274 			if (curwin->w_cursor.lnum == 0
6275 				|| curwin->w_cursor.lnum
6276 						    < ourscope - ind_maxparen)
6277 			{
6278 			    /* nothing found (abuse ind_maxparen as limit)
6279 			     * assume terminated line (i.e. a variable
6280 			     * initialization) */
6281 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
6282 				amount = cont_amount;
6283 			    else
6284 				amount += ind_continuation;
6285 			    break;
6286 			}
6287 
6288 			l = ml_get_curline();
6289 
6290 			/*
6291 			 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the
6292 			 * comment.
6293 			 */
6294 			trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment);
6295 			if (trypos != NULL)
6296 			{
6297 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6298 			    continue;
6299 			}
6300 
6301 			/*
6302 			 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
6303 			 */
6304 			if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6305 			    continue;
6306 
6307 			if (cin_nocode(l))
6308 			    continue;
6309 
6310 			terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6311 
6312 			/*
6313 			 * If we are at top level and the line looks like a
6314 			 * function declaration, we are done
6315 			 * (it's a variable declaration).
6316 			 */
6317 			if (start_brace != BRACE_IN_COL0
6318 				|| !cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
6319 			{
6320 			    /* if the line is terminated with another ','
6321 			     * it is a continued variable initialization.
6322 			     * don't add extra indent.
6323 			     * TODO: does not work, if  a function
6324 			     * declaration is split over multiple lines:
6325 			     * cin_isfuncdecl returns FALSE then.
6326 			     */
6327 			    if (terminated == ',')
6328 				break;
6329 
6330 			    /* if it es a enum declaration or an assignment,
6331 			     * we are done.
6332 			     */
6333 			    if (terminated != ';' && cin_isinit())
6334 				break;
6335 
6336 			    /* nothing useful found */
6337 			    if (terminated == 0 || terminated == '{')
6338 				continue;
6339 			}
6340 
6341 			if (terminated != ';')
6342 			{
6343 			    /* Skip parens and braces. Position the cursor
6344 			     * over the rightmost paren, so that matching it
6345 			     * will take us back to the start of the line.
6346 			     */					/* XXX */
6347 			    trypos = NULL;
6348 			    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')'))
6349 				trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6350 					ind_maxcomment);
6351 
6352 			    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6353 				trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6354 
6355 			    if (trypos != NULL)
6356 			    {
6357 				curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6358 				continue;
6359 			    }
6360 			}
6361 
6362 			/* it's a variable declaration, add indentation
6363 			 * like in
6364 			 * int a,
6365 			 *    b;
6366 			 */
6367 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6368 			    amount = cont_amount;
6369 			else
6370 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6371 		    }
6372 		    else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6373 		    {
6374 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6375 			    amount = cont_amount;
6376 			else
6377 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6378 		    }
6379 		    else if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6380 					  && lookfor != LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6381 		    {
6382 			amount = scope_amount;
6383 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6384 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6385 		    }
6386 		    break;
6387 		}
6388 
6389 		/*
6390 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
6391 		 */					    /* XXX */
6392 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6393 		{
6394 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6395 		    continue;
6396 		}
6397 
6398 		l = ml_get_curline();
6399 
6400 		/*
6401 		 * If this is a switch() label, may line up relative to that.
6402 		 * if this is a C++ scope declaration, do the same.
6403 		 */
6404 		iscase = cin_iscase(l);
6405 		if (iscase || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6406 		{
6407 		    /* we are only looking for cpp base class
6408 		     * declaration/initialization any longer */
6409 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6410 			break;
6411 
6412 		    /* When looking for a "do" we are not interested in
6413 		     * labels. */
6414 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
6415 			continue;
6416 
6417 		    /*
6418 		     *	case xx:
6419 		     *	    c = 99 +	    <- this indent plus continuation
6420 		     *->	   here;
6421 		     */
6422 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6423 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6424 		    {
6425 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6426 			    amount = cont_amount;
6427 			else
6428 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6429 			break;
6430 		    }
6431 
6432 		    /*
6433 		     *	case xx:	<- line up with this case
6434 		     *	    x = 333;
6435 		     *	case yy:
6436 		     */
6437 		    if (       (iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE)
6438 			    || (iscase && lookfor_break)
6439 			    || (!iscase && lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL))
6440 		    {
6441 			/*
6442 			 * Check that this case label is not for another
6443 			 * switch()
6444 			 */				    /* XXX */
6445 			if ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) ==
6446 					     NULL || trypos->lnum == ourscope)
6447 			{
6448 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6449 			    break;
6450 			}
6451 			continue;
6452 		    }
6453 
6454 		    n = get_indent_nolabel(curwin->w_cursor.lnum);  /* XXX */
6455 
6456 		    /*
6457 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
6458 		     *		      y = y + 1;
6459 		     * ->	  s = 99;
6460 		     *
6461 		     *	 case xx:
6462 		     *	     if (cond)		<- line up with this line
6463 		     *		 y = y + 1;
6464 		     * ->    s = 99;
6465 		     */
6466 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6467 		    {
6468 			if (n)
6469 			    amount = n;
6470 
6471 			if (!lookfor_break)
6472 			    break;
6473 		    }
6474 
6475 		    /*
6476 		     *	 case xx: x = x + 1;	    <- line up with this x
6477 		     * ->	  y = y + 1;
6478 		     *
6479 		     *	 case xx: if (cond)	    <- line up with this if
6480 		     * ->	       y = y + 1;
6481 		     */
6482 		    if (n)
6483 		    {
6484 			amount = n;
6485 			l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6486 			if (l != NULL && cin_is_cinword(l))
6487 			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6488 			break;
6489 		    }
6490 
6491 		    /*
6492 		     * Try to get the indent of a statement before the switch
6493 		     * label.  If nothing is found, line up relative to the
6494 		     * switch label.
6495 		     *	    break;		<- may line up with this line
6496 		     *	 case xx:
6497 		     * ->   y = 1;
6498 		     */
6499 		    scope_amount = get_indent() + (iscase    /* XXX */
6500 					? ind_case_code : ind_scopedecl_code);
6501 		    lookfor = ind_case_break ? LOOKFOR_NOBREAK : LOOKFOR_ANY;
6502 		    continue;
6503 		}
6504 
6505 		/*
6506 		 * Looking for a switch() label or C++ scope declaration,
6507 		 * ignore other lines, skip {}-blocks.
6508 		 */
6509 		if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CASE || lookfor == LOOKFOR_SCOPEDECL)
6510 		{
6511 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '{', '}') && (trypos =
6512 				    find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6513 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
6514 		    continue;
6515 		}
6516 
6517 		/*
6518 		 * Ignore jump labels with nothing after them.
6519 		 */
6520 		if (cin_islabel(ind_maxcomment))
6521 		{
6522 		    l = after_label(ml_get_curline());
6523 		    if (l == NULL || cin_nocode(l))
6524 			continue;
6525 		}
6526 
6527 		/*
6528 		 * Ignore #defines, #if, etc.
6529 		 * Ignore comment and empty lines.
6530 		 * (need to get the line again, cin_islabel() may have
6531 		 * unlocked it)
6532 		 */
6533 		l = ml_get_curline();
6534 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum)
6535 							     || cin_nocode(l))
6536 		    continue;
6537 
6538 		/*
6539 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or
6540 		 * constructor initialization?
6541 		 */						    /* XXX */
6542 		if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM && ind_cpp_baseclass
6543 					     && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
6544 		{
6545 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6546 		    {
6547 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6548 			    amount = cont_amount;
6549 			else
6550 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6551 		    }
6552 		    else if (col == 0 || theline[0] == '{')
6553 		    {
6554 			amount = get_indent();
6555 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6556 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6557 					ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6558 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum); /* XXX */
6559 			if (theline[0] != '{')
6560 			    amount += ind_cpp_baseclass;
6561 		    }
6562 		    else
6563 		    {
6564 			curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
6565 			getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
6566 			amount = (int)col;
6567 		    }
6568 		    break;
6569 		}
6570 		else if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS)
6571 		{
6572 		    /* only look, whether there is a cpp base class
6573 		     * declaration or initialization before the opening brace. */
6574 		    if (cin_isterminated(l, TRUE, FALSE))
6575 			break;
6576 		    else
6577 			continue;
6578 		}
6579 
6580 		/*
6581 		 * What happens next depends on the line being terminated.
6582 		 * If terminated with a ',' only consider it terminating if
6583 		 * there is anoter unterminated statement behind, eg:
6584 		 *   123,
6585 		 *   sizeof
6586 		 *	  here
6587 		 * Otherwise check whether it is a enumeration or structure
6588 		 * initialisation (not indented) or a variable declaration
6589 		 * (indented).
6590 		 */
6591 		terminated = cin_isterminated(l, FALSE, TRUE);
6592 
6593 		if (terminated == 0 || (lookfor != LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6594 							&& terminated == ','))
6595 		{
6596 		    /*
6597 		     * if we're in the middle of a paren thing,
6598 		     * go back to the line that starts it so
6599 		     * we can get the right prevailing indent
6600 		     *	   if ( foo &&
6601 		     *		    bar )
6602 		     */
6603 		    /*
6604 		     * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
6605 		     * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
6606 		     */
6607 		    (void)find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
6608 		    trypos = find_match_paren(
6609 				 corr_ind_maxparen(ind_maxparen, &cur_curpos),
6610 							      ind_maxcomment);
6611 
6612 		    /*
6613 		     * If we are looking for ',', we also look for matching
6614 		     * braces.
6615 		     */
6616 		    if (trypos == NULL && find_last_paren(l, '{', '}'))
6617 			trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);
6618 
6619 		    if (trypos != NULL)
6620 		    {
6621 			/*
6622 			 * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
6623 			 * handled above.
6624 			 *     case xx:  if ( asdf &&
6625 			 *			asdf)
6626 			 */
6627 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6628 			l = ml_get_curline();
6629 			if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6630 			{
6631 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6632 			    continue;
6633 			}
6634 		    }
6635 
6636 		    /*
6637 		     * Skip over continuation lines to find the one to get the
6638 		     * indent from
6639 		     * char *usethis = "bla\
6640 		     *		 bla",
6641 		     *      here;
6642 		     */
6643 		    if (terminated == ',')
6644 		    {
6645 			while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
6646 			{
6647 			    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
6648 			    if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
6649 				break;
6650 			    --curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6651 			}
6652 		    }
6653 
6654 		    /*
6655 		     * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
6656 		     * ignoring any jump label.	    XXX
6657 		     */
6658 		    cur_amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
6659 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
6660 
6661 		    /*
6662 		     * If this is just above the line we are indenting, and it
6663 		     * starts with a '{', line it up with this line.
6664 		     *		while (not)
6665 		     * ->	{
6666 		     *		}
6667 		     */
6668 		    if (terminated != ',' && lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM
6669 							 && theline[0] == '{')
6670 		    {
6671 			amount = cur_amount;
6672 			/*
6673 			 * Only add ind_open_extra when the current line
6674 			 * doesn't start with a '{', which must have a match
6675 			 * in the same line (scope is the same).  Probably:
6676 			 *	{ 1, 2 },
6677 			 * ->	{ 3, 4 }
6678 			 */
6679 			if (*skipwhite(l) != '{')
6680 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6681 
6682 			if (ind_cpp_baseclass)
6683 			{
6684 			    /* have to look back, whether it is a cpp base
6685 			     * class declaration or initialization */
6686 			    lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6687 			    continue;
6688 			}
6689 			break;
6690 		    }
6691 
6692 		    /*
6693 		     * Check if we are after an "if", "while", etc.
6694 		     * Also allow "   } else".
6695 		     */
6696 		    if (cin_is_cinword(l) || cin_iselse(skipwhite(l)))
6697 		    {
6698 			/*
6699 			 * Found an unterminated line after an if (), line up
6700 			 * with the last one.
6701 			 *   if (cond)
6702 			 *	    100 +
6703 			 * ->		here;
6704 			 */
6705 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6706 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6707 			{
6708 			    if (cont_amount > 0)
6709 				amount = cont_amount;
6710 			    else
6711 				amount += ind_continuation;
6712 			    break;
6713 			}
6714 
6715 			/*
6716 			 * If this is just above the line we are indenting, we
6717 			 * are finished.
6718 			 *	    while (not)
6719 			 * ->		here;
6720 			 * Otherwise this indent can be used when the line
6721 			 * before this is terminated.
6722 			 *	yyy;
6723 			 *	if (stat)
6724 			 *	    while (not)
6725 			 *		xxx;
6726 			 * ->	here;
6727 			 */
6728 			amount = cur_amount;
6729 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6730 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6731 			if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6732 			{
6733 			    amount += ind_level + ind_no_brace;
6734 			    break;
6735 			}
6736 
6737 			/*
6738 			 * Special trick: when expecting the while () after a
6739 			 * do, line up with the while()
6740 			 *     do
6741 			 *	    x = 1;
6742 			 * ->  here
6743 			 */
6744 			l = skipwhite(ml_get_curline());
6745 			if (cin_isdo(l))
6746 			{
6747 			    if (whilelevel == 0)
6748 				break;
6749 			    --whilelevel;
6750 			}
6751 
6752 			/*
6753 			 * When searching for a terminated line, don't use the
6754 			 * one between the "if" and the "else".
6755 			 * Need to use the scope of this "else".  XXX
6756 			 * If whilelevel != 0 continue looking for a "do {".
6757 			 */
6758 			if (cin_iselse(l)
6759 				&& whilelevel == 0
6760 				&& ((trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
6761 								    == NULL
6762 				    || find_match(LOOKFOR_IF, trypos->lnum,
6763 					ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment) == FAIL))
6764 			    break;
6765 		    }
6766 
6767 		    /*
6768 		     * If we're below an unterminated line that is not an
6769 		     * "if" or something, we may line up with this line or
6770 		     * add someting for a continuation line, depending on
6771 		     * the line before this one.
6772 		     */
6773 		    else
6774 		    {
6775 			/*
6776 			 * Found two unterminated lines on a row, line up with
6777 			 * the last one.
6778 			 *   c = 99 +
6779 			 *	    100 +
6780 			 * ->	    here;
6781 			 */
6782 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM)
6783 			{
6784 			    /* When line ends in a comma add extra indent */
6785 			    if (terminated == ',')
6786 				amount += ind_continuation;
6787 			    break;
6788 			}
6789 
6790 			if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6791 			{
6792 			    /* Found two lines ending in ',', lineup with the
6793 			     * lowest one, but check for cpp base class
6794 			     * declaration/initialization, if it is an
6795 			     * opening brace or we are looking just for
6796 			     * enumerations/initializations. */
6797 			    if (terminated == ',')
6798 			    {
6799 				if (ind_cpp_baseclass == 0)
6800 				    break;
6801 
6802 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_CPP_BASECLASS;
6803 				continue;
6804 			    }
6805 
6806 			    /* Ignore unterminated lines in between, but
6807 			     * reduce indent. */
6808 			    if (amount > cur_amount)
6809 				amount = cur_amount;
6810 			}
6811 			else
6812 			{
6813 			    /*
6814 			     * Found first unterminated line on a row, may
6815 			     * line up with this line, remember its indent
6816 			     *	    100 +
6817 			     * ->	    here;
6818 			     */
6819 			    amount = cur_amount;
6820 
6821 			    /*
6822 			     * If previous line ends in ',', check whether we
6823 			     * are in an initialization or enum
6824 			     * struct xxx =
6825 			     * {
6826 			     *      sizeof a,
6827 			     *      124 };
6828 			     * or a normal possible continuation line.
6829 			     * but only, of no other statement has been found
6830 			     * yet.
6831 			     */
6832 			    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL && terminated == ',')
6833 			    {
6834 				lookfor = LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT;
6835 				cont_amount = cin_first_id_amount();
6836 			    }
6837 			    else
6838 			    {
6839 				if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_INITIAL
6840 					&& *l != NUL
6841 					&& l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
6842 								/* XXX */
6843 				    cont_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(
6844 						       curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
6845 				if (lookfor != LOOKFOR_TERM)
6846 				    lookfor = LOOKFOR_UNTERM;
6847 			    }
6848 			}
6849 		    }
6850 		}
6851 
6852 		/*
6853 		 * Check if we are after a while (cond);
6854 		 * If so: Ignore until the matching "do".
6855 		 */
6856 							/* XXX */
6857 		else if (cin_iswhileofdo(l,
6858 					 curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
6859 		{
6860 		    /*
6861 		     * Found an unterminated line after a while ();, line up
6862 		     * with the last one.
6863 		     *	    while (cond);
6864 		     *	    100 +		<- line up with this one
6865 		     * ->	    here;
6866 		     */
6867 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6868 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6869 		    {
6870 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6871 			    amount = cont_amount;
6872 			else
6873 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6874 			break;
6875 		    }
6876 
6877 		    if (whilelevel == 0)
6878 		    {
6879 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_TERM;
6880 			amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
6881 			if (theline[0] == '{')
6882 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
6883 		    }
6884 		    ++whilelevel;
6885 		}
6886 
6887 		/*
6888 		 * We are after a "normal" statement.
6889 		 * If we had another statement we can stop now and use the
6890 		 * indent of that other statement.
6891 		 * Otherwise the indent of the current statement may be used,
6892 		 * search backwards for the next "normal" statement.
6893 		 */
6894 		else
6895 		{
6896 		    /*
6897 		     * Skip single break line, if before a switch label. It
6898 		     * may be lined up with the case label.
6899 		     */
6900 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_NOBREAK
6901 				  && cin_isbreak(skipwhite(ml_get_curline())))
6902 		    {
6903 			lookfor = LOOKFOR_ANY;
6904 			continue;
6905 		    }
6906 
6907 		    /*
6908 		     * Handle "do {" line.
6909 		     */
6910 		    if (whilelevel > 0)
6911 		    {
6912 			l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
6913 			if (cin_isdo(l))
6914 			{
6915 			    amount = get_indent();	/* XXX */
6916 			    --whilelevel;
6917 			    continue;
6918 			}
6919 		    }
6920 
6921 		    /*
6922 		     * Found a terminated line above an unterminated line. Add
6923 		     * the amount for a continuation line.
6924 		     *	 x = 1;
6925 		     *	 y = foo +
6926 		     * ->	here;
6927 		     * or
6928 		     *	 int x = 1;
6929 		     *	 int foo,
6930 		     * ->	here;
6931 		     */
6932 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_UNTERM
6933 					   || lookfor == LOOKFOR_ENUM_OR_INIT)
6934 		    {
6935 			if (cont_amount > 0)
6936 			    amount = cont_amount;
6937 			else
6938 			    amount += ind_continuation;
6939 			break;
6940 		    }
6941 
6942 		    /*
6943 		     * Found a terminated line above a terminated line or "if"
6944 		     * etc. line. Use the amount of the line below us.
6945 		     *	 x = 1;				x = 1;
6946 		     *	 if (asdf)		    y = 2;
6947 		     *	     while (asdf)	  ->here;
6948 		     *		here;
6949 		     * ->foo;
6950 		     */
6951 		    if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_TERM)
6952 		    {
6953 			if (!lookfor_break && whilelevel == 0)
6954 			    break;
6955 		    }
6956 
6957 		    /*
6958 		     * First line above the one we're indenting is terminated.
6959 		     * To know what needs to be done look further backward for
6960 		     * a terminated line.
6961 		     */
6962 		    else
6963 		    {
6964 			/*
6965 			 * position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so
6966 			 * that matching it will take us back to the start of
6967 			 * the line.  Helps for:
6968 			 *     func(asdr,
6969 			 *	      asdfasdf);
6970 			 *     here;
6971 			 */
6972 term_again:
6973 			l = ml_get_curline();
6974 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
6975 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
6976 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
6977 			{
6978 			    /*
6979 			     * Check if we are on a case label now.  This is
6980 			     * handled above.
6981 			     *	   case xx:  if ( asdf &&
6982 			     *			    asdf)
6983 			     */
6984 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
6985 			    l = ml_get_curline();
6986 			    if (cin_iscase(l) || cin_isscopedecl(l))
6987 			    {
6988 				++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
6989 				continue;
6990 			    }
6991 			}
6992 
6993 			/* When aligning with the case statement, don't align
6994 			 * with a statement after it.
6995 			 *  case 1: {   <-- don't use this { position
6996 			 *	stat;
6997 			 *  }
6998 			 *  case 2:
6999 			 *	stat;
7000 			 * }
7001 			 */
7002 			iscase = (ind_keep_case_label && cin_iscase(l));
7003 
7004 			/*
7005 			 * Get indent and pointer to text for current line,
7006 			 * ignoring any jump label.
7007 			 */
7008 			amount = skip_label(curwin->w_cursor.lnum,
7009 							  &l, ind_maxcomment);
7010 
7011 			if (theline[0] == '{')
7012 			    amount += ind_open_extra;
7013 			/* See remark above: "Only add ind_open_extra.." */
7014 			if (*skipwhite(l) == '{')
7015 			    amount -= ind_open_extra;
7016 			lookfor = iscase ? LOOKFOR_ANY : LOOKFOR_TERM;
7017 
7018 			/*
7019 			 * If we're at the end of a block, skip to the start of
7020 			 * that block.
7021 			 */
7022 			curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7023 			if (*cin_skipcomment(l) == '}'
7024 				&& (trypos = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment))
7025 							    != NULL) /* XXX */
7026 			{
7027 			    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7028 			    /* if not "else {" check for terminated again */
7029 			    /* but skip block for "} else {" */
7030 			    l = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7031 			    if (*l == '}' || !cin_iselse(l))
7032 				goto term_again;
7033 			    ++curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7034 			}
7035 		    }
7036 		}
7037 	    }
7038 	}
7039       }
7040 
7041       /* add extra indent for a comment */
7042       if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7043 	  amount += ind_comment;
7044     }
7045 
7046     /*
7047      * ok -- we're not inside any sort of structure at all!
7048      *
7049      * this means we're at the top level, and everything should
7050      * basically just match where the previous line is, except
7051      * for the lines immediately following a function declaration,
7052      * which are K&R-style parameters and need to be indented.
7053      */
7054     else
7055     {
7056 	/*
7057 	 * if our line starts with an open brace, forget about any
7058 	 * prevailing indent and make sure it looks like the start
7059 	 * of a function
7060 	 */
7061 
7062 	if (theline[0] == '{')
7063 	{
7064 	    amount = ind_first_open;
7065 	}
7066 
7067 	/*
7068 	 * If the NEXT line is a function declaration, the current
7069 	 * line needs to be indented as a function type spec.
7070 	 * Don't do this if the current line looks like a comment
7071 	 * or if the current line is terminated, ie. ends in ';'.
7072 	 */
7073 	else if (cur_curpos.lnum < curbuf->b_ml.ml_line_count
7074 		&& !cin_nocode(theline)
7075 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)":", NULL)
7076 		&& !cin_ends_in(theline, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7077 		&& cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum + 1)
7078 		&& !cin_isterminated(theline, FALSE, TRUE))
7079 	{
7080 	    amount = ind_func_type;
7081 	}
7082 	else
7083 	{
7084 	    amount = 0;
7085 	    curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7086 
7087 	    /* search backwards until we find something we recognize */
7088 
7089 	    while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7090 	    {
7091 		curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7092 		curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7093 
7094 		l = ml_get_curline();
7095 
7096 		/*
7097 		 * If we're in a comment now, skip to the start of the comment.
7098 		 */						/* XXX */
7099 		if ((trypos = find_start_comment(ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7100 		{
7101 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum + 1;
7102 		    continue;
7103 		}
7104 
7105 		/*
7106 		 * Are we at the start of a cpp base class declaration or constructor
7107 		 * initialization?
7108 		 */						    /* XXX */
7109 		if (ind_cpp_baseclass != 0 && theline[0] != '{'
7110 					     && cin_is_cpp_baseclass(l, &col))
7111 		{
7112 		    if (col == 0)
7113 		    {
7114 			amount = get_indent() + ind_cpp_baseclass;  /* XXX */
7115 			if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7116 				&& (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7117 					ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7118 			    amount = get_indent_lnum(trypos->lnum)
7119 					   + ind_cpp_baseclass;	    /* XXX */
7120 		    }
7121 		    else
7122 		    {
7123 			curwin->w_cursor.col = col;
7124 			getvcol(curwin, &curwin->w_cursor, &col, NULL, NULL);
7125 			amount = (int)col;
7126 		    }
7127 		    break;
7128 		}
7129 
7130 		/*
7131 		 * Skip preprocessor directives and blank lines.
7132 		 */
7133 		if (cin_ispreproc_cont(&l, &curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7134 		    continue;
7135 
7136 		if (cin_nocode(l))
7137 		    continue;
7138 
7139 		/*
7140 		 * If the previous line ends in ',', use one level of
7141 		 * indentation:
7142 		 * int foo,
7143 		 *     bar;
7144 		 * do this before checking for '}' in case of eg.
7145 		 * enum foobar
7146 		 * {
7147 		 *   ...
7148 		 * } foo,
7149 		 *   bar;
7150 		 */
7151 		n = 0;
7152 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7153 			     || (*l != NUL && (n = l[STRLEN(l) - 1]) == '\\'))
7154 		{
7155 		    /* take us back to opening paren */
7156 		    if (find_last_paren(l, '(', ')')
7157 			    && (trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7158 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7159 			curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7160 
7161 		    /* For a line ending in ',' that is a continuation line go
7162 		     * back to the first line with a backslash:
7163 		     * char *foo = "bla\
7164 		     *		 bla",
7165 		     *      here;
7166 		     */
7167 		    while (n == 0 && curwin->w_cursor.lnum > 1)
7168 		    {
7169 			l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7170 			if (*l == NUL || l[STRLEN(l) - 1] != '\\')
7171 			    break;
7172 			--curwin->w_cursor.lnum;
7173 		    }
7174 
7175 		    amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7176 
7177 		    if (amount == 0)
7178 			amount = cin_first_id_amount();
7179 		    if (amount == 0)
7180 			amount = ind_continuation;
7181 		    break;
7182 		}
7183 
7184 		/*
7185 		 * If the line looks like a function declaration, and we're
7186 		 * not in a comment, put it the left margin.
7187 		 */
7188 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(NULL, cur_curpos.lnum))  /* XXX */
7189 		    break;
7190 		l = ml_get_curline();
7191 
7192 		/*
7193 		 * Finding the closing '}' of a previous function.  Put
7194 		 * current line at the left margin.  For when 'cino' has "fs".
7195 		 */
7196 		if (*skipwhite(l) == '}')
7197 		    break;
7198 
7199 		/*			    (matching {)
7200 		 * If the previous line ends on '};' (maybe followed by
7201 		 * comments) align at column 0.  For example:
7202 		 * char *string_array[] = { "foo",
7203 		 *     / * x * / "b};ar" }; / * foobar * /
7204 		 */
7205 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)"};", NULL))
7206 		    break;
7207 
7208 		/*
7209 		 * If the PREVIOUS line is a function declaration, the current
7210 		 * line (and the ones that follow) needs to be indented as
7211 		 * parameters.
7212 		 */
7213 		if (cin_isfuncdecl(&l, curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7214 		{
7215 		    amount = ind_param;
7216 		    break;
7217 		}
7218 
7219 		/*
7220 		 * If the previous line ends in ';' and the line before the
7221 		 * previous line ends in ',' or '\', ident to column zero:
7222 		 * int foo,
7223 		 *     bar;
7224 		 * indent_to_0 here;
7225 		 */
7226 		if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u*)";", NULL))
7227 		{
7228 		    l = ml_get(curwin->w_cursor.lnum - 1);
7229 		    if (cin_ends_in(l, (char_u *)",", NULL)
7230 			    || (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\'))
7231 			break;
7232 		    l = ml_get_curline();
7233 		}
7234 
7235 		/*
7236 		 * Doesn't look like anything interesting -- so just
7237 		 * use the indent of this line.
7238 		 *
7239 		 * Position the cursor over the rightmost paren, so that
7240 		 * matching it will take us back to the start of the line.
7241 		 */
7242 		find_last_paren(l, '(', ')');
7243 
7244 		if ((trypos = find_match_paren(ind_maxparen,
7245 						     ind_maxcomment)) != NULL)
7246 		    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = trypos->lnum;
7247 		amount = get_indent();	    /* XXX */
7248 		break;
7249 	    }
7250 
7251 	    /* add extra indent for a comment */
7252 	    if (cin_iscomment(theline))
7253 		amount += ind_comment;
7254 
7255 	    /* add extra indent if the previous line ended in a backslash:
7256 	     *	      "asdfasdf\
7257 	     *		  here";
7258 	     *	    char *foo = "asdf\
7259 	     *			 here";
7260 	     */
7261 	    if (cur_curpos.lnum > 1)
7262 	    {
7263 		l = ml_get(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7264 		if (*l != NUL && l[STRLEN(l) - 1] == '\\')
7265 		{
7266 		    cur_amount = cin_get_equal_amount(cur_curpos.lnum - 1);
7267 		    if (cur_amount > 0)
7268 			amount = cur_amount;
7269 		    else if (cur_amount == 0)
7270 			amount += ind_continuation;
7271 		}
7272 	    }
7273 	}
7274     }
7275 
7276 theend:
7277     /* put the cursor back where it belongs */
7278     curwin->w_cursor = cur_curpos;
7279 
7280     vim_free(linecopy);
7281 
7282     if (amount < 0)
7283 	return 0;
7284     return amount;
7285 }
7286 
7287     static int
7288 find_match(lookfor, ourscope, ind_maxparen, ind_maxcomment)
7289     int		lookfor;
7290     linenr_T	ourscope;
7291     int		ind_maxparen;
7292     int		ind_maxcomment;
7293 {
7294     char_u	*look;
7295     pos_T	*theirscope;
7296     char_u	*mightbeif;
7297     int		elselevel;
7298     int		whilelevel;
7299 
7300     if (lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7301     {
7302 	elselevel = 1;
7303 	whilelevel = 0;
7304     }
7305     else
7306     {
7307 	elselevel = 0;
7308 	whilelevel = 1;
7309     }
7310 
7311     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7312 
7313     while (curwin->w_cursor.lnum > ourscope + 1)
7314     {
7315 	curwin->w_cursor.lnum--;
7316 	curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7317 
7318 	look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7319 	if (cin_iselse(look)
7320 		|| cin_isif(look)
7321 		|| cin_isdo(look)			    /* XXX */
7322 		|| cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7323 	{
7324 	    /*
7325 	     * if we've gone outside the braces entirely,
7326 	     * we must be out of scope...
7327 	     */
7328 	    theirscope = find_start_brace(ind_maxcomment);  /* XXX */
7329 	    if (theirscope == NULL)
7330 		break;
7331 
7332 	    /*
7333 	     * and if the brace enclosing this is further
7334 	     * back than the one enclosing the else, we're
7335 	     * out of luck too.
7336 	     */
7337 	    if (theirscope->lnum < ourscope)
7338 		break;
7339 
7340 	    /*
7341 	     * and if they're enclosed in a *deeper* brace,
7342 	     * then we can ignore it because it's in a
7343 	     * different scope...
7344 	     */
7345 	    if (theirscope->lnum > ourscope)
7346 		continue;
7347 
7348 	    /*
7349 	     * if it was an "else" (that's not an "else if")
7350 	     * then we need to go back to another if, so
7351 	     * increment elselevel
7352 	     */
7353 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7354 	    if (cin_iselse(look))
7355 	    {
7356 		mightbeif = cin_skipcomment(look + 4);
7357 		if (!cin_isif(mightbeif))
7358 		    ++elselevel;
7359 		continue;
7360 	    }
7361 
7362 	    /*
7363 	     * if it was a "while" then we need to go back to
7364 	     * another "do", so increment whilelevel.  XXX
7365 	     */
7366 	    if (cin_iswhileofdo(look, curwin->w_cursor.lnum, ind_maxparen))
7367 	    {
7368 		++whilelevel;
7369 		continue;
7370 	    }
7371 
7372 	    /* If it's an "if" decrement elselevel */
7373 	    look = cin_skipcomment(ml_get_curline());
7374 	    if (cin_isif(look))
7375 	    {
7376 		elselevel--;
7377 		/*
7378 		 * When looking for an "if" ignore "while"s that
7379 		 * get in the way.
7380 		 */
7381 		if (elselevel == 0 && lookfor == LOOKFOR_IF)
7382 		    whilelevel = 0;
7383 	    }
7384 
7385 	    /* If it's a "do" decrement whilelevel */
7386 	    if (cin_isdo(look))
7387 		whilelevel--;
7388 
7389 	    /*
7390 	     * if we've used up all the elses, then
7391 	     * this must be the if that we want!
7392 	     * match the indent level of that if.
7393 	     */
7394 	    if (elselevel <= 0 && whilelevel <= 0)
7395 	    {
7396 		return OK;
7397 	    }
7398 	}
7399     }
7400     return FAIL;
7401 }
7402 
7403 # if defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
7404 /*
7405  * Get indent level from 'indentexpr'.
7406  */
7407     int
7408 get_expr_indent()
7409 {
7410     int		indent;
7411     pos_T	pos;
7412     int		save_State;
7413 
7414     pos = curwin->w_cursor;
7415     set_vim_var_nr(VV_LNUM, curwin->w_cursor.lnum);
7416     ++sandbox;
7417     indent = eval_to_number(curbuf->b_p_inde);
7418     --sandbox;
7419 
7420     /* Restore the cursor position so that 'indentexpr' doesn't need to.
7421      * Pretend to be in Insert mode, allow cursor past end of line for "o"
7422      * command. */
7423     save_State = State;
7424     State = INSERT;
7425     curwin->w_cursor = pos;
7426     check_cursor();
7427     State = save_State;
7428 
7429     /* If there is an error, just keep the current indent. */
7430     if (indent < 0)
7431 	indent = get_indent();
7432 
7433     return indent;
7434 }
7435 # endif
7436 
7437 #endif /* FEAT_CINDENT */
7438 
7439 #if defined(FEAT_LISP) || defined(PROTO)
7440 
7441 static int lisp_match __ARGS((char_u *p));
7442 
7443     static int
7444 lisp_match(p)
7445     char_u	*p;
7446 {
7447     char_u	buf[LSIZE];
7448     int		len;
7449     char_u	*word = p_lispwords;
7450 
7451     while (*word != NUL)
7452     {
7453 	(void)copy_option_part(&word, buf, LSIZE, ",");
7454 	len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
7455 	if (STRNCMP(buf, p, len) == 0 && p[len] == ' ')
7456 	    return TRUE;
7457     }
7458     return FALSE;
7459 }
7460 
7461 /*
7462  * When 'p' is present in 'cpoptions, a Vi compatible method is used.
7463  * The incompatible newer method is quite a bit better at indenting
7464  * code in lisp-like languages than the traditional one; it's still
7465  * mostly heuristics however -- Dirk van Deun, [email protected]
7466  *
7467  * TODO:
7468  * Findmatch() should be adapted for lisp, also to make showmatch
7469  * work correctly: now (v5.3) it seems all C/C++ oriented:
7470  * - it does not recognize the #\( and #\) notations as character literals
7471  * - it doesn't know about comments starting with a semicolon
7472  * - it incorrectly interprets '(' as a character literal
7473  * All this messes up get_lisp_indent in some rare cases.
7474  * Update from Sergey Khorev:
7475  * I tried to fix the first two issues.
7476  */
7477     int
7478 get_lisp_indent()
7479 {
7480     pos_T	*pos, realpos, paren;
7481     int		amount;
7482     char_u	*that;
7483     colnr_T	col;
7484     colnr_T	firsttry;
7485     int		parencount, quotecount;
7486     int		vi_lisp;
7487 
7488     /* Set vi_lisp to use the vi-compatible method */
7489     vi_lisp = (vim_strchr(p_cpo, CPO_LISP) != NULL);
7490 
7491     realpos = curwin->w_cursor;
7492     curwin->w_cursor.col = 0;
7493 
7494     if ((pos = findmatch(NULL, '(')) == NULL)
7495 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7496     else
7497     {
7498 	paren = *pos;
7499 	pos = findmatch(NULL, '[');
7500 	if (pos == NULL || ltp(pos, &paren))
7501 	    pos = &paren;
7502     }
7503     if (pos != NULL)
7504     {
7505 	/* Extra trick: Take the indent of the first previous non-white
7506 	 * line that is at the same () level. */
7507 	amount = -1;
7508 	parencount = 0;
7509 
7510 	while (--curwin->w_cursor.lnum >= pos->lnum)
7511 	{
7512 	    if (linewhite(curwin->w_cursor.lnum))
7513 		continue;
7514 	    for (that = ml_get_curline(); *that != NUL; ++that)
7515 	    {
7516 		if (*that == ';')
7517 		{
7518 		    while (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7519 			++that;
7520 		    continue;
7521 		}
7522 		if (*that == '\\')
7523 		{
7524 		    if (*(that + 1) != NUL)
7525 			++that;
7526 		    continue;
7527 		}
7528 		if (*that == '"' && *(that + 1) != NUL)
7529 		{
7530 		    that++;
7531 		    while (*that && (*that != '"' || *(that - 1) == '\\'))
7532 			++that;
7533 		}
7534 		if (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7535 		    ++parencount;
7536 		else if (*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7537 		    --parencount;
7538 	    }
7539 	    if (parencount == 0)
7540 	    {
7541 		amount = get_indent();
7542 		break;
7543 	    }
7544 	}
7545 
7546 	if (amount == -1)
7547 	{
7548 	    curwin->w_cursor.lnum = pos->lnum;
7549 	    curwin->w_cursor.col = pos->col;
7550 	    col = pos->col;
7551 
7552 	    that = ml_get_curline();
7553 
7554 	    if (vi_lisp && get_indent() == 0)
7555 		amount = 2;
7556 	    else
7557 	    {
7558 		amount = 0;
7559 		while (*that && col)
7560 		{
7561 		    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that, (colnr_T)amount);
7562 		    col--;
7563 		}
7564 
7565 		/*
7566 		 * Some keywords require "body" indenting rules (the
7567 		 * non-standard-lisp ones are Scheme special forms):
7568 		 *
7569 		 * (let ((a 1))    instead    (let ((a 1))
7570 		 *   (...))	      of	   (...))
7571 		 */
7572 
7573 		if (!vi_lisp && (*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7574 						      && lisp_match(that + 1))
7575 		    amount += 2;
7576 		else
7577 		{
7578 		    that++;
7579 		    amount++;
7580 		    firsttry = amount;
7581 
7582 		    while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7583 		    {
7584 			amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7585 			++that;
7586 		    }
7587 
7588 		    if (*that && *that != ';') /* not a comment line */
7589 		    {
7590 			/* test *that != '(' to accomodate first let/do
7591 			 * argument if it is more than one line */
7592 			if (!vi_lisp && *that != '(' && *that != '[')
7593 			    firsttry++;
7594 
7595 			parencount = 0;
7596 			quotecount = 0;
7597 
7598 			if (vi_lisp
7599 				|| (*that != '"'
7600 				    && *that != '\''
7601 				    && *that != '#'
7602 				    && (*that < '0' || *that > '9')))
7603 			{
7604 			    while (*that
7605 				    && (!vim_iswhite(*that)
7606 					|| quotecount
7607 					|| parencount)
7608 				    && (!((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7609 					    && !quotecount
7610 					    && !parencount
7611 					    && vi_lisp)))
7612 			    {
7613 				if (*that == '"')
7614 				    quotecount = !quotecount;
7615 				if ((*that == '(' || *that == '[')
7616 							       && !quotecount)
7617 				    ++parencount;
7618 				if ((*that == ')' || *that == ']')
7619 							       && !quotecount)
7620 				    --parencount;
7621 				if (*that == '\\' && *(that+1) != NUL)
7622 				    amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7623 							     (colnr_T)amount);
7624 				amount += lbr_chartabsize_adv(&that,
7625 							     (colnr_T)amount);
7626 			    }
7627 			}
7628 			while (vim_iswhite(*that))
7629 			{
7630 			    amount += lbr_chartabsize(that, (colnr_T)amount);
7631 			    that++;
7632 			}
7633 			if (!*that || *that == ';')
7634 			    amount = firsttry;
7635 		    }
7636 		}
7637 	    }
7638 	}
7639     }
7640     else
7641 	amount = 0;	/* no matching '(' or '[' found, use zero indent */
7642 
7643     curwin->w_cursor = realpos;
7644 
7645     return amount;
7646 }
7647 #endif /* FEAT_LISP */
7648 
7649     void
7650 prepare_to_exit()
7651 {
7652 #ifdef FEAT_GUI
7653     if (gui.in_use)
7654     {
7655 	gui.dying = TRUE;
7656 	out_trash();	/* trash any pending output */
7657     }
7658     else
7659 #endif
7660     {
7661 	windgoto((int)Rows - 1, 0);
7662 
7663 	/*
7664 	 * Switch terminal mode back now, so messages end up on the "normal"
7665 	 * screen (if there are two screens).
7666 	 */
7667 	settmode(TMODE_COOK);
7668 #ifdef WIN3264
7669 	if (can_end_termcap_mode(FALSE) == TRUE)
7670 #endif
7671 	    stoptermcap();
7672 	out_flush();
7673     }
7674 }
7675 
7676 /*
7677  * Preserve files and exit.
7678  * When called IObuff must contain a message.
7679  */
7680     void
7681 preserve_exit()
7682 {
7683     buf_T	*buf;
7684 
7685     prepare_to_exit();
7686 
7687     out_str(IObuff);
7688     screen_start();		    /* don't know where cursor is now */
7689     out_flush();
7690 
7691     ml_close_notmod();		    /* close all not-modified buffers */
7692 
7693     for (buf = firstbuf; buf != NULL; buf = buf->b_next)
7694     {
7695 	if (buf->b_ml.ml_mfp != NULL && buf->b_ml.ml_mfp->mf_fname != NULL)
7696 	{
7697 	    OUT_STR(_("Vim: preserving files...\n"));
7698 	    screen_start();	    /* don't know where cursor is now */
7699 	    out_flush();
7700 	    ml_sync_all(FALSE, FALSE);	/* preserve all swap files */
7701 	    break;
7702 	}
7703     }
7704 
7705     ml_close_all(FALSE);	    /* close all memfiles, without deleting */
7706 
7707     OUT_STR(_("Vim: Finished.\n"));
7708 
7709     getout(1);
7710 }
7711 
7712 /*
7713  * return TRUE if "fname" exists.
7714  */
7715     int
7716 vim_fexists(fname)
7717     char_u  *fname;
7718 {
7719     struct stat st;
7720 
7721     if (mch_stat((char *)fname, &st))
7722 	return FALSE;
7723     return TRUE;
7724 }
7725 
7726 /*
7727  * Check for CTRL-C pressed, but only once in a while.
7728  * Should be used instead of ui_breakcheck() for functions that check for
7729  * each line in the file.  Calling ui_breakcheck() each time takes too much
7730  * time, because it can be a system call.
7731  */
7732 
7733 #ifndef BREAKCHECK_SKIP
7734 # ifdef FEAT_GUI		    /* assume the GUI only runs on fast computers */
7735 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 200
7736 # else
7737 #  define BREAKCHECK_SKIP 32
7738 # endif
7739 #endif
7740 
7741 static int	breakcheck_count = 0;
7742 
7743     void
7744 line_breakcheck()
7745 {
7746     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP)
7747     {
7748 	breakcheck_count = 0;
7749 	ui_breakcheck();
7750     }
7751 }
7752 
7753 /*
7754  * Like line_breakcheck() but check 10 times less often.
7755  */
7756     void
7757 fast_breakcheck()
7758 {
7759     if (++breakcheck_count >= BREAKCHECK_SKIP * 10)
7760     {
7761 	breakcheck_count = 0;
7762 	ui_breakcheck();
7763     }
7764 }
7765 
7766 /*
7767  * Expand wildcards.  Calls gen_expand_wildcards() and removes files matching
7768  * 'wildignore'.
7769  */
7770     int
7771 expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
7772     int		   num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
7773     char_u	 **pat;		/* array of input patterns */
7774     int		  *num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
7775     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
7776     int		   flags;	/* EW_DIR, etc. */
7777 {
7778     int		retval;
7779     int		i, j;
7780     char_u	*p;
7781     int		non_suf_match;	/* number without matching suffix */
7782 
7783     retval = gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
7784 
7785     /* When keeping all matches, return here */
7786     if (flags & EW_KEEPALL)
7787 	return retval;
7788 
7789 #ifdef FEAT_WILDIGN
7790     /*
7791      * Remove names that match 'wildignore'.
7792      */
7793     if (*p_wig)
7794     {
7795 	char_u	*ffname;
7796 
7797 	/* check all files in (*file)[] */
7798 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
7799 	{
7800 	    ffname = FullName_save((*file)[i], FALSE);
7801 	    if (ffname == NULL)		/* out of memory */
7802 		break;
7803 # ifdef VMS
7804 	    vms_remove_version(ffname);
7805 # endif
7806 	    if (match_file_list(p_wig, (*file)[i], ffname))
7807 	    {
7808 		/* remove this matching file from the list */
7809 		vim_free((*file)[i]);
7810 		for (j = i; j + 1 < *num_file; ++j)
7811 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j + 1];
7812 		--*num_file;
7813 		--i;
7814 	    }
7815 	    vim_free(ffname);
7816 	}
7817     }
7818 #endif
7819 
7820     /*
7821      * Move the names where 'suffixes' match to the end.
7822      */
7823     if (*num_file > 1)
7824     {
7825 	non_suf_match = 0;
7826 	for (i = 0; i < *num_file; ++i)
7827 	{
7828 	    if (!match_suffix((*file)[i]))
7829 	    {
7830 		/*
7831 		 * Move the name without matching suffix to the front
7832 		 * of the list.
7833 		 */
7834 		p = (*file)[i];
7835 		for (j = i; j > non_suf_match; --j)
7836 		    (*file)[j] = (*file)[j - 1];
7837 		(*file)[non_suf_match++] = p;
7838 	    }
7839 	}
7840     }
7841 
7842     return retval;
7843 }
7844 
7845 /*
7846  * Return TRUE if "fname" matches with an entry in 'suffixes'.
7847  */
7848     int
7849 match_suffix(fname)
7850     char_u	*fname;
7851 {
7852     int		fnamelen, setsuflen;
7853     char_u	*setsuf;
7854 #define MAXSUFLEN 30	    /* maximum length of a file suffix */
7855     char_u	suf_buf[MAXSUFLEN];
7856 
7857     fnamelen = (int)STRLEN(fname);
7858     setsuflen = 0;
7859     for (setsuf = p_su; *setsuf; )
7860     {
7861 	setsuflen = copy_option_part(&setsuf, suf_buf, MAXSUFLEN, ".,");
7862 	if (fnamelen >= setsuflen
7863 		&& fnamencmp(suf_buf, fname + fnamelen - setsuflen,
7864 					      (size_t)setsuflen) == 0)
7865 	    break;
7866 	setsuflen = 0;
7867     }
7868     return (setsuflen != 0);
7869 }
7870 
7871 #if !defined(NO_EXPANDPATH) || defined(PROTO)
7872 
7873 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
7874 static int vim_backtick __ARGS((char_u *p));
7875 static int expand_backtick __ARGS((garray_T *gap, char_u *pat, int flags));
7876 # endif
7877 
7878 # if defined(MSDOS) || defined(FEAT_GUI_W16) || defined(WIN3264)
7879 /*
7880  * File name expansion code for MS-DOS, Win16 and Win32.  It's here because
7881  * it's shared between these systems.
7882  */
7883 # if defined(DJGPP) || defined(PROTO)
7884 #  define _cdecl	    /* DJGPP doesn't have this */
7885 # else
7886 #  ifdef __BORLANDC__
7887 #   define _cdecl _RTLENTRYF
7888 #  endif
7889 # endif
7890 
7891 /*
7892  * comparison function for qsort in dos_expandpath()
7893  */
7894     static int _cdecl
7895 pstrcmp(const void *a, const void *b)
7896 {
7897     return (pathcmp(*(char **)a, *(char **)b));
7898 }
7899 
7900 # ifndef WIN3264
7901     static void
7902 namelowcpy(
7903     char_u *d,
7904     char_u *s)
7905 {
7906 #  ifdef DJGPP
7907     if (USE_LONG_FNAME)	    /* don't lower case on Windows 95/NT systems */
7908 	while (*s)
7909 	    *d++ = *s++;
7910     else
7911 #  endif
7912 	while (*s)
7913 	    *d++ = TOLOWER_LOC(*s++);
7914     *d = NUL;
7915 }
7916 # endif
7917 
7918 /*
7919  * Recursively build up a list of files in "gap" matching the first wildcard
7920  * in `path'.  Called by expand_wildcards().
7921  * Return the number of matches found.
7922  * "path" has backslashes before chars that are not to be expanded, starting
7923  * at "path[wildoff]".
7924  */
7925     static int
7926 dos_expandpath(
7927     garray_T	*gap,
7928     char_u	*path,
7929     int		wildoff,
7930     int		flags)		/* EW_* flags */
7931 {
7932     char_u		*buf;
7933     char_u		*path_end;
7934     char_u		*p, *s, *e;
7935     int			start_len = gap->ga_len;
7936     int			ok;
7937 #ifdef WIN3264
7938     WIN32_FIND_DATA	fb;
7939     HANDLE		hFind = (HANDLE)0;
7940 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
7941     WIN32_FIND_DATAW    wfb;
7942     WCHAR		*wn = NULL;	/* UCS-2 name, NULL when not used. */
7943 # endif
7944 #else
7945     struct ffblk	fb;
7946 #endif
7947     int			matches;
7948     int			starts_with_dot;
7949     int			len;
7950     char_u		*pat;
7951     regmatch_T		regmatch;
7952     char_u		*matchname;
7953 
7954     /* make room for file name */
7955     buf = alloc((unsigned int)STRLEN(path) + BASENAMELEN + 5);
7956     if (buf == NULL)
7957 	return 0;
7958 
7959     /*
7960      * Find the first part in the path name that contains a wildcard or a ~1.
7961      * Copy it into buf, including the preceding characters.
7962      */
7963     p = buf;
7964     s = buf;
7965     e = NULL;
7966     path_end = path;
7967     while (*path_end != NUL)
7968     {
7969 	/* May ignore a wildcard that has a backslash before it; it will
7970 	 * be removed by rem_backslash() or file_pat_to_reg_pat() below. */
7971 	if (path_end >= path + wildoff && rem_backslash(path_end))
7972 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
7973 	else if (*path_end == '\\' || *path_end == ':' || *path_end == '/')
7974 	{
7975 	    if (e != NULL)
7976 		break;
7977 	    s = p + 1;
7978 	}
7979 	else if (path_end >= path + wildoff
7980 			 && vim_strchr((char_u *)"*?[~", *path_end) != NULL)
7981 	    e = p;
7982 #ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
7983 	if (has_mbyte)
7984 	{
7985 	    len = (*mb_ptr2len_check)(path_end);
7986 	    STRNCPY(p, path_end, len);
7987 	    p += len;
7988 	    path_end += len;
7989 	}
7990 	else
7991 #endif
7992 	    *p++ = *path_end++;
7993     }
7994     e = p;
7995     *e = NUL;
7996 
7997     /* now we have one wildcard component between s and e */
7998     /* Remove backslashes between "wildoff" and the start of the wildcard
7999      * component. */
8000     for (p = buf + wildoff; p < s; ++p)
8001 	if (rem_backslash(p))
8002 	{
8003 	    STRCPY(p, p + 1);
8004 	    --e;
8005 	    --s;
8006 	}
8007 
8008     starts_with_dot = (*s == '.');
8009     pat = file_pat_to_reg_pat(s, e, NULL, FALSE);
8010     if (pat == NULL)
8011     {
8012 	vim_free(buf);
8013 	return 0;
8014     }
8015 
8016     /* compile the regexp into a program */
8017     regmatch.rm_ic = TRUE;		/* Always ignore case */
8018     regmatch.regprog = vim_regcomp(pat, RE_MAGIC);
8019     vim_free(pat);
8020 
8021     if (regmatch.regprog == NULL)
8022     {
8023 	vim_free(buf);
8024 	return 0;
8025     }
8026 
8027     /* remember the pattern or file name being looked for */
8028     matchname = vim_strsave(s);
8029 
8030     /* Scan all files in the directory with "dir/ *.*" */
8031     STRCPY(s, "*.*");
8032 #ifdef WIN3264
8033 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8034     if (enc_codepage >= 0 && (int)GetACP() != enc_codepage)
8035     {
8036 	/* The active codepage differs from 'encoding'.  Attempt using the
8037 	 * wide function.  If it fails because it is not implemented fall back
8038 	 * to the non-wide version (for Windows 98) */
8039 	wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8040 	if (wn != NULL)
8041 	{
8042 	    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8043 	    if (hFind == INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE
8044 			      && GetLastError() == ERROR_CALL_NOT_IMPLEMENTED)
8045 	    {
8046 		vim_free(wn);
8047 		wn = NULL;
8048 	    }
8049 	}
8050     }
8051 
8052     if (wn == NULL)
8053 # endif
8054 	hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8055     ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8056 #else
8057     /* If we are expanding wildcards we try both files and directories */
8058     ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8059 		(*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8060 #endif
8061 
8062     while (ok)
8063     {
8064 #ifdef WIN3264
8065 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8066 	if (wn != NULL)
8067 	    p = ucs2_to_enc(wfb.cFileName, NULL);   /* p is allocated here */
8068 	else
8069 # endif
8070 	    p = (char_u *)fb.cFileName;
8071 #else
8072 	p = (char_u *)fb.ff_name;
8073 #endif
8074 	/* Ignore entries starting with a dot, unless when asked for.  Accept
8075 	 * all entries found with "matchname". */
8076 	if ((p[0] != '.' || starts_with_dot)
8077 		&& (matchname == NULL
8078 		    || vim_regexec(&regmatch, p, (colnr_T)0)))
8079 	{
8080 #ifdef WIN3264
8081 	    STRCPY(s, p);
8082 #else
8083 	    namelowcpy(s, p);
8084 #endif
8085 	    len = (int)STRLEN(buf);
8086 	    STRCPY(buf + len, path_end);
8087 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(path_end))
8088 	    {
8089 		/* need to expand another component of the path */
8090 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8091 		(void)dos_expandpath(gap, buf, len + 1, flags);
8092 	    }
8093 	    else
8094 	    {
8095 		/* no more wildcards, check if there is a match */
8096 		/* remove backslashes for the remaining components only */
8097 		if (*path_end != 0)
8098 		    backslash_halve(buf + len + 1);
8099 		if (mch_getperm(buf) >= 0)	/* add existing file */
8100 		    addfile(gap, buf, flags);
8101 	    }
8102 	}
8103 
8104 #ifdef WIN3264
8105 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8106 	if (wn != NULL)
8107 	{
8108 	    vim_free(p);
8109 	    ok = FindNextFileW(hFind, &wfb);
8110 	}
8111 	else
8112 # endif
8113 	    ok = FindNextFile(hFind, &fb);
8114 #else
8115 	ok = (findnext(&fb) == 0);
8116 #endif
8117 
8118 	/* If no more matches and no match was used, try expanding the name
8119 	 * itself.  Finds the long name of a short filename. */
8120 	if (!ok && matchname != NULL && gap->ga_len == start_len)
8121 	{
8122 	    STRCPY(s, matchname);
8123 #ifdef WIN3264
8124 	    FindClose(hFind);
8125 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8126 	    if (wn != NULL)
8127 	    {
8128 		vim_free(wn);
8129 		wn = enc_to_ucs2(buf, NULL);
8130 		if (wn != NULL)
8131 		    hFind = FindFirstFileW(wn, &wfb);
8132 	    }
8133 	    if (wn == NULL)
8134 # endif
8135 		hFind = FindFirstFile(buf, &fb);
8136 	    ok = (hFind != INVALID_HANDLE_VALUE);
8137 #else
8138 	    ok = (findfirst((char *)buf, &fb,
8139 		 (*path_end != NUL || (flags & EW_DIR)) ? FA_DIREC : 0) == 0);
8140 #endif
8141 	    vim_free(matchname);
8142 	    matchname = NULL;
8143 	}
8144     }
8145 
8146 #ifdef WIN3264
8147     FindClose(hFind);
8148 # ifdef FEAT_MBYTE
8149     vim_free(wn);
8150 # endif
8151 #endif
8152     vim_free(buf);
8153     vim_free(regmatch.regprog);
8154     vim_free(matchname);
8155 
8156     matches = gap->ga_len - start_len;
8157     if (matches > 0)
8158 	qsort(((char_u **)gap->ga_data) + start_len, (size_t)matches,
8159 						   sizeof(char_u *), pstrcmp);
8160     return matches;
8161 }
8162 
8163     int
8164 mch_expandpath(
8165     garray_T	*gap,
8166     char_u	*path,
8167     int		flags)		/* EW_* flags */
8168 {
8169     return dos_expandpath(gap, path, 0, flags);
8170 }
8171 # endif /* MSDOS || FEAT_GUI_W16 || WIN3264 */
8172 
8173 /*
8174  * Generic wildcard expansion code.
8175  *
8176  * Characters in "pat" that should not be expanded must be preceded with a
8177  * backslash. E.g., "/path\ with\ spaces/my\*star*"
8178  *
8179  * Return FAIL when no single file was found.  In this case "num_file" is not
8180  * set, and "file" may contain an error message.
8181  * Return OK when some files found.  "num_file" is set to the number of
8182  * matches, "file" to the array of matches.  Call FreeWild() later.
8183  */
8184     int
8185 gen_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags)
8186     int		num_pat;	/* number of input patterns */
8187     char_u	**pat;		/* array of input patterns */
8188     int		*num_file;	/* resulting number of files */
8189     char_u	***file;	/* array of resulting files */
8190     int		flags;		/* EW_* flags */
8191 {
8192     int			i;
8193     garray_T		ga;
8194     char_u		*p;
8195     static int		recursive = FALSE;
8196     int			add_pat;
8197 
8198     /*
8199      * expand_env() is called to expand things like "~user".  If this fails,
8200      * it calls ExpandOne(), which brings us back here.  In this case, always
8201      * call the machine specific expansion function, if possible.  Otherwise,
8202      * return FAIL.
8203      */
8204     if (recursive)
8205 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8206 	return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8207 #else
8208 	return FAIL;
8209 #endif
8210 
8211 #ifdef SPECIAL_WILDCHAR
8212     /*
8213      * If there are any special wildcard characters which we cannot handle
8214      * here, call machine specific function for all the expansion.  This
8215      * avoids starting the shell for each argument separately.
8216      * For `=expr` do use the internal function.
8217      */
8218     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; i++)
8219     {
8220 	if (vim_strpbrk(pat[i], (char_u *)SPECIAL_WILDCHAR) != NULL
8221 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8222 		&& !(vim_backtick(pat[i]) && pat[i][1] == '=')
8223 # endif
8224 	   )
8225 	    return mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file, flags);
8226     }
8227 #endif
8228 
8229     recursive = TRUE;
8230 
8231     /*
8232      * The matching file names are stored in a growarray.  Init it empty.
8233      */
8234     ga_init2(&ga, (int)sizeof(char_u *), 30);
8235 
8236     for (i = 0; i < num_pat; ++i)
8237     {
8238 	add_pat = -1;
8239 	p = pat[i];
8240 
8241 #ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8242 	if (vim_backtick(p))
8243 	    add_pat = expand_backtick(&ga, p, flags);
8244 	else
8245 #endif
8246 	{
8247 	    /*
8248 	     * First expand environment variables, "~/" and "~user/".
8249 	     */
8250 	    if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8251 	    {
8252 		p = expand_env_save(p);
8253 		if (p == NULL)
8254 		    p = pat[i];
8255 #ifdef UNIX
8256 		/*
8257 		 * On Unix, if expand_env() can't expand an environment
8258 		 * variable, use the shell to do that.  Discard previously
8259 		 * found file names and start all over again.
8260 		 */
8261 		else if (vim_strpbrk(p, (char_u *)"$~") != NULL)
8262 		{
8263 		    vim_free(p);
8264 		    ga_clear(&ga);
8265 		    i = mch_expand_wildcards(num_pat, pat, num_file, file,
8266 								       flags);
8267 		    recursive = FALSE;
8268 		    return i;
8269 		}
8270 #endif
8271 	    }
8272 
8273 	    /*
8274 	     * If there are wildcards: Expand file names and add each match to
8275 	     * the list.  If there is no match, and EW_NOTFOUND is given, add
8276 	     * the pattern.
8277 	     * If there are no wildcards: Add the file name if it exists or
8278 	     * when EW_NOTFOUND is given.
8279 	     */
8280 	    if (mch_has_exp_wildcard(p))
8281 		add_pat = mch_expandpath(&ga, p, flags);
8282 	}
8283 
8284 	if (add_pat == -1 || (add_pat == 0 && (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)))
8285 	{
8286 	    char_u	*t = backslash_halve_save(p);
8287 
8288 #if defined(MACOS_CLASSIC)
8289 	    slash_to_colon(t);
8290 #endif
8291 	    /* When EW_NOTFOUND is used, always add files and dirs.  Makes
8292 	     * "vim c:/" work. */
8293 	    if (flags & EW_NOTFOUND)
8294 		addfile(&ga, t, flags | EW_DIR | EW_FILE);
8295 	    else if (mch_getperm(t) >= 0)
8296 		addfile(&ga, t, flags);
8297 	    vim_free(t);
8298 	}
8299 
8300 	if (p != pat[i])
8301 	    vim_free(p);
8302     }
8303 
8304     *num_file = ga.ga_len;
8305     *file = (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? (char_u **)ga.ga_data : (char_u **)"";
8306 
8307     recursive = FALSE;
8308 
8309     return (ga.ga_data != NULL) ? OK : FAIL;
8310 }
8311 
8312 # ifdef VIM_BACKTICK
8313 
8314 /*
8315  * Return TRUE if we can expand this backtick thing here.
8316  */
8317     static int
8318 vim_backtick(p)
8319     char_u	*p;
8320 {
8321     return (*p == '`' && *(p + 1) != NUL && *(p + STRLEN(p) - 1) == '`');
8322 }
8323 
8324 /*
8325  * Expand an item in `backticks` by executing it as a command.
8326  * Currently only works when pat[] starts and ends with a `.
8327  * Returns number of file names found.
8328  */
8329     static int
8330 expand_backtick(gap, pat, flags)
8331     garray_T	*gap;
8332     char_u	*pat;
8333     int		flags;	/* EW_* flags */
8334 {
8335     char_u	*p;
8336     char_u	*cmd;
8337     char_u	*buffer;
8338     int		cnt = 0;
8339     int		i;
8340 
8341     /* Create the command: lop off the backticks. */
8342     cmd = vim_strnsave(pat + 1, (int)STRLEN(pat) - 2);
8343     if (cmd == NULL)
8344 	return 0;
8345 
8346 #ifdef FEAT_EVAL
8347     if (*cmd == '=')	    /* `={expr}`: Expand expression */
8348 	buffer = eval_to_string(cmd + 1, &p);
8349     else
8350 #endif
8351 	buffer = get_cmd_output(cmd, (flags & EW_SILENT) ? SHELL_SILENT : 0);
8352     vim_free(cmd);
8353     if (buffer == NULL)
8354 	return 0;
8355 
8356     cmd = buffer;
8357     while (*cmd != NUL)
8358     {
8359 	cmd = skipwhite(cmd);		/* skip over white space */
8360 	p = cmd;
8361 	while (*p != NUL && *p != '\r' && *p != '\n') /* skip over entry */
8362 	    ++p;
8363 	/* add an entry if it is not empty */
8364 	if (p > cmd)
8365 	{
8366 	    i = *p;
8367 	    *p = NUL;
8368 	    addfile(gap, cmd, flags);
8369 	    *p = i;
8370 	    ++cnt;
8371 	}
8372 	cmd = p;
8373 	while (*cmd != NUL && (*cmd == '\r' || *cmd == '\n'))
8374 	    ++cmd;
8375     }
8376 
8377     vim_free(buffer);
8378     return cnt;
8379 }
8380 # endif /* VIM_BACKTICK */
8381 
8382 /*
8383  * Add a file to a file list.  Accepted flags:
8384  * EW_DIR	add directories
8385  * EW_FILE	add files
8386  * EW_NOTFOUND	add even when it doesn't exist
8387  * EW_ADDSLASH	add slash after directory name
8388  */
8389     void
8390 addfile(gap, f, flags)
8391     garray_T	*gap;
8392     char_u	*f;	/* filename */
8393     int		flags;
8394 {
8395     char_u	*p;
8396     int		isdir;
8397 
8398     /* if the file/dir doesn't exist, may not add it */
8399     if (!(flags & EW_NOTFOUND) && mch_getperm(f) < 0)
8400 	return;
8401 
8402 #ifdef FNAME_ILLEGAL
8403     /* if the file/dir contains illegal characters, don't add it */
8404     if (vim_strpbrk(f, (char_u *)FNAME_ILLEGAL) != NULL)
8405 	return;
8406 #endif
8407 
8408     isdir = mch_isdir(f);
8409     if ((isdir && !(flags & EW_DIR)) || (!isdir && !(flags & EW_FILE)))
8410 	return;
8411 
8412     /* Make room for another item in the file list. */
8413     if (ga_grow(gap, 1) == FAIL)
8414 	return;
8415 
8416     p = alloc((unsigned)(STRLEN(f) + 1 + isdir));
8417     if (p == NULL)
8418 	return;
8419 
8420     STRCPY(p, f);
8421 #ifdef BACKSLASH_IN_FILENAME
8422     slash_adjust(p);
8423 #endif
8424     /*
8425      * Append a slash or backslash after directory names if none is present.
8426      */
8427 #ifndef DONT_ADD_PATHSEP_TO_DIR
8428     if (isdir && (flags & EW_ADDSLASH))
8429 	add_pathsep(p);
8430 #endif
8431     ((char_u **)gap->ga_data)[gap->ga_len++] = p;
8432     --gap->ga_room;
8433 }
8434 #endif /* !NO_EXPANDPATH */
8435 
8436 #if defined(VIM_BACKTICK) || defined(FEAT_EVAL) || defined(PROTO)
8437 
8438 #ifndef SEEK_SET
8439 # define SEEK_SET 0
8440 #endif
8441 #ifndef SEEK_END
8442 # define SEEK_END 2
8443 #endif
8444 
8445 /*
8446  * Get the stdout of an external command.
8447  * Returns an allocated string, or NULL for error.
8448  */
8449     char_u *
8450 get_cmd_output(cmd, flags)
8451     char_u	*cmd;
8452     int		flags;		/* can be SHELL_SILENT */
8453 {
8454     char_u	*tempname;
8455     char_u	*command;
8456     char_u	*buffer = NULL;
8457     int		len;
8458     int		i = 0;
8459     FILE	*fd;
8460 
8461     if (check_restricted() || check_secure())
8462 	return NULL;
8463 
8464     /* get a name for the temp file */
8465     if ((tempname = vim_tempname('o')) == NULL)
8466     {
8467 	EMSG(_(e_notmp));
8468 	return NULL;
8469     }
8470 
8471     /* Add the redirection stuff */
8472     command = make_filter_cmd(cmd, NULL, tempname);
8473     if (command == NULL)
8474 	goto done;
8475 
8476     /*
8477      * Call the shell to execute the command (errors are ignored).
8478      * Don't check timestamps here.
8479      */
8480     ++no_check_timestamps;
8481     call_shell(command, SHELL_DOOUT | SHELL_EXPAND | flags);
8482     --no_check_timestamps;
8483 
8484     vim_free(command);
8485 
8486     /*
8487      * read the names from the file into memory
8488      */
8489 # ifdef VMS
8490     /* created temporary file is not allways readable as binary */
8491     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, "r");
8492 # else
8493     fd = mch_fopen((char *)tempname, READBIN);
8494 # endif
8495 
8496     if (fd == NULL)
8497     {
8498 	EMSG2(_(e_notopen), tempname);
8499 	goto done;
8500     }
8501 
8502     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_END);
8503     len = ftell(fd);		    /* get size of temp file */
8504     fseek(fd, 0L, SEEK_SET);
8505 
8506     buffer = alloc(len + 1);
8507     if (buffer != NULL)
8508 	i = (int)fread((char *)buffer, (size_t)1, (size_t)len, fd);
8509     fclose(fd);
8510     mch_remove(tempname);
8511     if (buffer == NULL)
8512 	goto done;
8513 #ifdef VMS
8514     len = i;	/* VMS doesn't give us what we asked for... */
8515 #endif
8516     if (i != len)
8517     {
8518 	EMSG2(_(e_notread), tempname);
8519 	vim_free(buffer);
8520 	buffer = NULL;
8521     }
8522     else
8523 	buffer[len] = '\0';	/* make sure the buffer is terminated */
8524 
8525 done:
8526     vim_free(tempname);
8527     return buffer;
8528 }
8529 #endif
8530 
8531 /*
8532  * Free the list of files returned by expand_wildcards() or other expansion
8533  * functions.
8534  */
8535     void
8536 FreeWild(count, files)
8537     int	    count;
8538     char_u  **files;
8539 {
8540     if (files == NULL || count <= 0)
8541 	return;
8542 #if defined(__EMX__) && defined(__ALWAYS_HAS_TRAILING_NULL_POINTER) /* XXX */
8543     /*
8544      * Is this still OK for when other functions than expand_wildcards() have
8545      * been used???
8546      */
8547     _fnexplodefree((char **)files);
8548 #else
8549     while (count--)
8550 	vim_free(files[count]);
8551     vim_free(files);
8552 #endif
8553 }
8554 
8555 /*
8556  * return TRUE when need to go to Insert mode because of 'insertmode'.
8557  * Don't do this when still processing a command or a mapping.
8558  * Don't do this when inside a ":normal" command.
8559  */
8560     int
8561 goto_im()
8562 {
8563     return (p_im && stuff_empty() && typebuf_typed());
8564 }
8565